V  *Vw 


<V^VvV/*'V^w,^ ', 


v^yvv.vi'iTvww 


^'•^VVI 


■^^i*fe^" 


George  Washington  Flowers 
Memorial  Collection 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 


ESTABLISHED  BY  THE 

FAMILY  OF 

COLONEL  FLOWERS 


[by  authority.] 

INFANTRY  TACTICS, 

FOR  THE 

IXSTRUCTION,  EXERCISE,  AND  MAN(EUVRES 


THE  SOLDIER,  A  COMPAXY,  LINE  OF  SKIRMISHERS, 
BATTALION,  BRIGADE, 

OB 

CORPS   D  '  A  R  M  l^J  E  . 


BRIG.  GEN.  SILAS  CASEY, 


Vol.  III. 

EVOLUTION'S  OF  A  BRIGADE  AND  CORPS  D'ARMEE. 


COLUMBIA: 

STEAM-PO\Vf;R  PRESSES  OF  EVAXS   i   COCSWELI.. 

1864. 


^13 


Head'-quauters,  Department  op  S.  C,  Ga.,  and  Fla., 

Charhmon,  S.  C,  'Feh.  26,  1864. 
Gentlemen  :  By  tlie  publication  of  Casey's  Evolutions 
of  a  Brigade  and  Division  or  Army  Corps,  you  will  render 
an  incalculable  service  to  the  Confederate  Army,  as  you 
will  supply  our  officers  with  the  best  work  of  the  sort  in  tho 
language,  and  a  necessary  supplem(?nt  to  Hardee's  School 
of  the  Company  and  Battalion,  which  hitherto  has  not  been 
accessible  to  them.  I  was  stationed  with  General  Casey,  as 
an  officer  of  the  United  States  Army,  when-  he  was  prepar- 
ing this  book,  and  can  testily  to  the  industrious  research, 
tactical  knowledge,  and  ability  which  were  employed  upon 
it.  The  sooner  it  is  put  in  the  hands  of  our  infantry  offi- 
cers the  better. 

Respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

THOMAS  JORDAN, 
Bn'gadier-General,  P.  A.  C.  S. 

To  Messrs.  Evans  «fc  Cogswell, 

Ptthlishers,  Columbia,  S.  C 


^1 5(^7  ■ 


ABBREVIATIOiNS. 

S.  S.  Will  stand  for  School  of  the  Soldier. 
S.  C.      "       "        "    School  of  the  Company. 
S.  B.     "      '•        '•    Scliool  of  the  Battalion. 
KB.     "      "        "    Kvolutiona  of  a  Brigade. 


Paragraphs   marked   0  are   suspended,  and   will   not  bo 
taught. 

CHANG  F. 

Paragraph  015,  E.  B.,  will  be  applicable  to  any  skirmish- 


EfOuVTICMS 


Fi^.  1. 

IxM  of  Ic^U, VLaru,hju.ofa  ImgaA^ 
of  four  baiialL<}n£ 

N"  Z.  r 


ZxTiA,  0+'  hauUbUvrciwo  lauLS.uf  c 
'briy(X<i^,offour  ba^^xxJ^uiwu. 


l-^^Mmiillllllll 


INFANTRY   TACTICS 


TITLE  YI. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  BRIGADE. 
General  principles  for  the  evolutions  of  a  brigade. 

1.  The  school  of  the  battalion  comprehending  the 
principles  and  details  of  all  the  movements  that  ought 
in  any  case  to  be  made  by  a  single  battalion,  these 
principles  will  now  be  applied  to  a  brigade. 

2.  In  this  instruction,  a  brigade  consisting  of  four 
battalions  will  be  supposed;  but  the  rules  hei'cin 
prescribed  are  equally  applicable  to  two  or  three 
battalions. 

Posts  of  the  brigadier-genei'al  in  line  and  in  column. 

3.  In  line  of  battle  composed  of  several  brigades, 
the  generals  of  brigade  will  place  themselves  at  about 
seventy  paces  in  rear  of  the  centres  of  their  brigades. 

4.  ]n  column,  they  will  hold  themselves  at  about 
thirty  paces  outside  of  the  guides,  and  abreast  with 
the  centres  of  their  brigades. 

5.  If  a  brigade  be  acting  by  itself,  its  brigadier- 
general  will,  when  it  is  in  line  of  battle,  take  such 
position  as  he  may  judge  necessary;  and  if  it  be  in 
column,  he  will  hold  himself  habitually  at  its  head. 

G.  The  brigadier-general  will  look  to  the  exact  and 
regular  execution  of  all  signals,  notifications,  or  coln- 
mands  coming  from  the  major-general  of  the  division 


A-(c7be)'? 


G  EVOLrnoxs  or  a  brioade. 

to  which  he  may  belong  ;  accordingly,  he  may  repair 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  necessary,  with- 
in the  extent  of  his  brigade. 

General  rules  for  commands. 

7.  The  general  (by  which  term-,  in  these  evolutions, 
will  be  understood  the  brigadier-general  in  command) 
will  always  give  ofders  to  his  brigade  byword  of  com- 
mand. 

8.  When  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  a  move- 
ment to  be  executed,  he  will  give  the  general  com- 
mands relative  thereto.  Each  colonel  will  always 
Successively  repeat,  with  the  greatest  rapidity,  on 
their  reaching  him,  those  general  commands,  unless 
the  general  has  given,  or  sent  to  him,  an  order  to  the 
contrary. 

9.  The  colonels  having  repeated  the  general  com- 
mands, as  just  prescribed,  will  immediately  command, 
and  cause  to  be  executed,  without  waiting  for  each 
other,  the  preparatory  movements  which,  in  their 
battalions,  ought  to  precede  the" execution  of  the  gen- 
eral movement. 

•10.  The  general  will  look  to  the  prompt  execution 
•of  these  preparatory  movements  in  his  brigade,  and 
rectify  any  error  that  may  be  commjtted  by  the 
colonels. 

11.  The  final  command,  or  that  which  determines 
the  execution  of  the  general  movement,  will  always 
be  given  by  the  general. 

12.  The  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  will  repeat 
the  general  commands,  whether  of  caution  or  of  exe- 
cution, as  often  as  the  wind  or  the  noise  of  arms  may 
prevent  those  counnands  from  being  easily  heard  from 
one  battalion  to  another. 

•13.  When,  from  any  cause,  a  colonel  shall  not  have 
heard  the  general  command,  lie  will,  on  seeing  the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE.  7 

battalion  next  to  liis  own  executing  a  movement, 
immediately  cause  his  battalion  to  execute  the  same 
movement. 

14.  When  a  line  has  to  execute  a  central  move- 
ment, the  general  will  go  to  the  point  which  he  may 
select  for  it,  and  give  or  send  to  each  of  the  neighbor- 
ing battalions  the  order  relative  to  the  movement 
which  each  portion  of  the  Hnc  has  to  execute,  as  here- 
inafter explained. 

15.  In  column,  commands  will  be  extended,  by 
repetition,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

16.  When  a  brigade  is  formed  in  two  lines,  the 
second  line,  in  all  the  manoeuvres,  Avill^preserve  its 
relative  position  to  the  first,  and  conform*  to  its  move- 
ments. The  chiefs  of  the  battalions  of  the  second 
line  are  charged  with  the  preservation  of  the  proper 
distances.  If  the  movement  is  to  be  executed  by  only 
one  of  the  lines,  the  cautionary  command  by  the  gen- 
eral will  be  preceded  by  the  words  ^/irst  line,  or  second 
line. 

Position  of  the  brigade  battery. 

-  1 7.  In  line  of  battle,  the  brigade  battery,  consisting 
of  eight  pieces,  four  of  them  rifled,  will  be  posted  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
brigade  if  it  is  in  one  line,  and  abgut  thirty  paces  in 
rear  of  the  second  line,  if  the  brigade  is  drawn  up  fn 
two  lines. 

18.  In  general,  if  exposed  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy, 
and  circumstances  do  not  require  that  it  should  join 
in  the  action,  the  battery  can  remove  a  greater  dis- 
tance to  the  rear  than  indicated  above. 

19.  In  all  the  evolutions,  and  without  orders  to  the 
contrary,  the  battery  will  preserve  its  relative  posi- 
tion, and  conform  to  the  movements  of  the  other 
troops. 


8  KVOLVTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE. 

PoBition  of  the  cavalry  of  the  brigade. 

20.  The  cavalry  of  the  brigade,  eonsi.stiriir  of  four 
squadrons,  contaiiiinfr  about  right  hundri'd  troopers,* 
uidess  eni])lo}ed  in  a  S])ecial  manner,  will  be  drawn 
up  about  three  hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre, 
or  wings,  of  the  first  line,  if  the  brigade  is  in  one  line, 
and  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  second, 
if  the  brigade  is  in  two  lines.  In  the  evolutions  it 
will  preserve  its  relative  position. 

*It  is  not  intended,  in  the  r.monnt  of  artillery  and  cavalry  bere 
specified  for  a  Vrigi^de.  containing:  aliont  fonr  thinsand  infantry,  to 
fix  definitively  the  proportions  which  tliese  arms  of  ser\  ice  shoxUd  in 
all  cases  bear  to  each  other.  These  proportions  depend  npon  many 
exigencies,  and  are  continijally  chanyin;;.  As  a  general  rnle.  how- 
eve',  the  numbers  here  assumed  arc  not  far  from  correct,  and  will, 
at  all  events,  serve  to  illustrate  the  manoeuvres  of  these  different 
arms  iu  conjunction. 


P:V0LUTI0NS    of    a    BiaGAI>E — PART    I.  9 

PART  FIRST. 

Article  1. 
To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

21.  The  general,  wishing  to  cause  ranks  to  be  open- 
ed, will  command : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranis. 

22.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant- 
colonels  and  senior  majors  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  5.  B.,  No.  28 ;  the  colonels 
will  immediately  commaTul :  7o  the  rear^  open  order. 
The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March. 

23.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  ranks  will  be  opened 
in  conformity  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  *S'.  B.  Each 
battalion  will  execute  the  movement  as  if  it  were 
isolated  ;  accordingly,  it  need  not  be  attempted  to 
align  the  rear  rank  of  one  battalion  on  that  of  other 
battalions. 

2-4.  The  general  will  cause  ranks  to  be  closed  by 
'the  commands  prescribed  in  the  S.  B. 

Article  II. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

25.  The  manual  of  arms  will  never  be  executed  in 
line. 

Article  III. 

Loading  at  will  and  the  firings. 

26.  In  line,  only  loading  at  will  will  be  executed. 


10  KVOLUTIOX3    OF    A    RUIGADK — PART    I. 

27.  The  general,  wishing  to  cause  arms  to  be  load- 
ed, will  command  : 

1.  Prepare  to  load. 

28.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
add: 

2.  Load. 

29.  This,  immediately  repeated,  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed  in  the  S.  B. 

30.  The  general,  wisliing  to  cause  the  fire  to  be 
executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  1)1/  haltalion  for  rank^  or  icing,  or  company). 

31.  Thk  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
add: 

2.  Commence  Jiring. 

32.  The  fire  by  battalion  will  commence  with  the 
odd-numbered  battalions.     The  command  commence 

firinfi  having  been  repeated  by  all  the  colonels,  those 
of  the  odd  battalions  will  immediately  give  the  com- 
mands prescribed  in  the  S.  B.  for  the  execution  of 
this  particular  fire. 

33.  The  colonels  of  even-numbered  battalions  will 
not  give  their  first  command  until  they  see  some  pieces 
brought  back  to  the  shoulder  in  the  odd  battalion  to 
their  right ;  the  colonels  of  the  odd  battalions,  in  their 
turn,  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  even 
battalion,  next  to  the  left  of  each,  and  the  fire  will 
thus  be  continued  by  alterna,te  battalions. 

34.  The  fire  by  wing  will  be  executed  in  each  bat- 
talion as  prescribed  in  the  aS'.  Z>.  ;  each  colonel  hav- 
ing repeated   Uie   command   commence  firing,   will 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    ERIGADE — PART    I.  11 

iinip.ediately  ;j[ivc  the  commands  Indicated  for  tlie 
execution  of  this  fire,  without  re^uhitin<j  hjmsclf  by 
the  next  battalion. 

35.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  tlie  S.  B. 

3G.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  in  the  follow- 
ing manner;  the  general  will  command  : 

1 .  Fire  hj  file. 

37.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
Id:  1.  j5 
command 


add:  \ .  BaliaVion  ;  2.  Rkady.   The  general  will  then 


2.   Commence  firing. 

38.  At  this,  repeated  by  the  colonels,  the  fire  by 
file  will  commence,  and  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  *S'.  B. 

39.  The  general  will  cause  each  of  the  foregoing 
fires  to  cease  by  a  very  short  roll,  or  bugle  sound, 
which  will  be  repeated  by  the  drums  or  bugles  of 
each  battalion  the  moment  it  is  heard.  As  soon  as 
each  battalion  reloads,  its  colonel  will  give  the  signal 
for  the  tap  on  the  drum,  or  note  on  the  bugle,  for  the 
return  of  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

40.  The  general,  Avishing  to  cause  the  fires  to  be 
executed  by  the  rear  rank,  will  command : 

Face  by  the  rear  rank. 

41.  Ihis  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels  will 
immediately  add  :  1.  Battalion;  2.  About — Face. 

42.  The  general  will  then  cause  the  several  fires  to 
be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
above. 


12         EVOLUTIONS    OV    A    BlUGADK — I'ART    I. 

43.  The  goneral  having  cnnsocl  the  firing  by  the 
roar  rank  to  cease,  and  Avlshing  to  bring  the  line 
back  to  its  proper  front,  will  command: 

Face  hy  the  front  rank. 

44.  The  colonels,  having  repeated  this  command, 
will  each  immediately  add  :  1,  Ballalion  ;  2.  About — 
Fack. 

ukmarks  ox  fiuing. 

45.  In  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  the  kind  of  fire 
will  be  dcteiniinod  by  tlie  character  of  the  ground, 
and  the  state  of  the  action. 

4G.  A  battalion,  having  in  its  front  a  height,  or 
other  obstacle  to  its  fire,  will  advance  as  far  as  neces- 
sary, in  order  that  its  fire  may  be  elfectual. 

47.  Artillery  having  in  general  a  greater  range 
than  infantry,  should  open  its  fire  previous  to  the 
infantry  battalions.  The  battery  should  protect  the 
infantry  Avhile  moving  forward  to  attack  with  its  fire 
a  position  in  front;  it  should  fire  when  the  infantiy 
advances,  and  withdraw  when  the  latter  commences 
the  fire.  The  batteiy,  in  general,  will  not  be  moved 
in  front  of  the  troops,  and  without  urgent  necessity 
it  Avill  not  remain  exposed  to  well-sustained  fire  of 
the  enemy's  infantry.  If  so  exposed,  its  fire  will  be 
rapid,  so  as  to  inflict  as  nmch  loss  as  possible  on  the 
enemy. 

To  Best. 

48.  The  general,  wishing  to  give  relaxation  to  the 
line,  will  command : 

1.  Prepare  to  rest. 

49..  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
continue : 


EVOLUTIONS    OF 'A    DRIGADE—PART    I.         13 

2.  Order — Arms. 

50.  This  having  been  repeated  and  executed,  he 
will  add : 

3.  In  place  rest  (or  simply,  rest). 

51.  This  will  be  executed  as  proscribed  in  tlie  S:  B. 

52.  If,  after  arms  are  ordered,  the  general  wishes  to 
cause  arms  to  be  sta:rked,  he  will  command  : 

Slack  arms. 

53.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels  will 
cause  the  stacks  to  be  formed ;  which  being  executed, 
each  will  immediately  cause  ranks  to  be  broken,  with- 
out regulating  himself  by  any  other  colonel,  in  the 
manner  prescribed  in  the  S.  B. 

5-4.  The  general,  wishing  to  terminate  the  relaxa- 
tion, will  cause  a  short  roll  or  bugle  sound  to  be  given, 
which  will  be  repeated  by  all  the  drums  or  bugles  of 
the  line,  at  the  instant  it  is  heard. 

55.  The  roll  or  sound  having  ceased,  the  colonels 
will  each  command :  Battalion,  at  which  the  men 
will  resume  the  fixed  position  of  ordered  arms;  if 
arms  be  stacked,  the  colonels  will  cause  the  men  to 
take  arms  before  giving  the  command  Battalion. 

56.  The  general  will  then  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

57.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  line  will  shoul- 
der arms. 


14         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BIUGADK — PAKT    II. 


PART  SECOND. 

DIFFERENT  MODES  OP  PASSING  FROM  THE 
ORDER  IN  BATTLE  TO  THE  ORDER  IN  COL- 
UMN. 

Articlk  T. 
To  break  to  the  front,  to  the  right  or  left  into  column. 

r>8.  The  general  -vvishing  to  cause  the  line  to  break 
by  company  or  by  division,  will  command: 

1.  By  company  (or  hy  divisioii)  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

59.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
add: 

2.  March  (or  douUe-quich — March). 

60.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  break 
according  to  the  principles  given  in  the  S.  B.  If 
the  line  is  in  march  it  Avill  break  as  prescribed  in  the 
same  school,  and  by  the  commands  prescribed  Nos. 
58  and  59. 

61.  In  that  school  it  has  been  prescribed  that,  the 
companies  having  broken,  the  guides  shall  stand  fast 
at  the  command  front,  given  by  their  captains,  al- 
though one  or  more  may  not  be  in  the  direction  of 
the  j)roceding  guides;  this  rule  will  be  observed  from 
one  battalion  to  another:  thus,  the  leading  guide  of 
one  battalion  will  not  stir  after  the  command  front 
given  by  his  captain,  although  he  may  not  be  in  the 
direction  of  the  guides  of  the  preceding  battalion  ; 
it  is  when  the  column  shall  be  put  in  march  that  the 
guides,  who  do  not  cover  in  file,  will  insensibly  bring 
themselves  on  the  direction,  so  that  each  may  march 
in  the  trace  of  the  one  next  preceding  him. 


KVOLUTIOXS    OF    A    BKIGADK — PART    II.         15 

62.  If  it  is  tlie  intention  of  the  general  that  the 
coliunn,  foi  med  cither  from  a  halt  or  march,  phould 
continue  the  march  after  -wheeling,  he  will  cause  the 
colonels  to  be  notified  before  the  commencement  of 
the  movement,  Avho  will  give  orders  accordingly- 

G3.  The  general,  Avishing  to  cause  the  line  to  break 
to  th.e  front,  to  the  right,  to  march  toward  the  left, 
^s^U  command: 

1.  Break  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left. 

64.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  on  the 
right  will  cause  his  battalion  to  commence  the  move- 
ment, which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  *S.  B. 

Go.  The  following  battalions  will  successively  make 
the  same  movement ;  the  colonels  will  seize  the  mo- 
ment for  causing  their  battaliotis  to  break,  and  each 
will  be  put  in  march,  so  that  there  may  be,  between 
its  leading  subdivision  and  the  rearmost  one  of  the 
preceding  battalion,  the  distance  of  a  subdivision  and 
twenty-two  paces. 

66.  The  general  will  cause  the  line  to  break  to  the 
left  to  march  to  the  right,  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

REMARKS.  - 

67.  Whenever  the  brigade  formed  in  two  lines 
breaks  or  ploys  into  simple  column  for  the  purpose 
of  marching,  the  colonels  of  the  second  line,  unless 
ordered  to  the  contrary,  will  form  their  battalions  in 
the  order  indicated  for  those  of  the  first  line,  and 
move  them  by  the  shortest  route  to  their  respective 
places  in  the  brigade  column,  as  soon  as  able  to  pass. 

Article  II. 
To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  into  column. 

68.  The  general,  wishing  to  c-ause  the  line  to  break 


16         EVOLUTION'S    OF    A    nillGADE— PART    11. 

to  tlic  rear  into  column  by  company,  or  by  division, 
will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  (or  /<?//)  nf  companies  (or  d  ids  ions')  ^ 
to  the  I'ear,  into  column. 

GO.  The  colonels,  liavlni;  roi)eated  this  command, 
will  immediately  add :  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — 
Fack. 

70.  The  general  will  then  command  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

71.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion  will 
break  as  prescribed  in  tlie  .S*.  B.  If  the  line  is  in 
march,  it  will  break  as  prescribed  in  the  same  school, 
and  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  68  and  follow- 
ing. 

Article  III. 
To  ploy  the  line  into  close  column,  or  in  mass. 

72.  The  general,  wishing  to  ploy  the  line  into  col- 
umn by  division  closed  in  mass,  In  rear  of  the  first 
division  of  the  first  battalion,  will  command: 

1.   Close  column  by  division.     2.  On  the  first  division, 
Jirst  battalion,  right  in  front. 

73.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  each 
colonel  will  add:  Battalion,  right — Face,  which  will 
be  executed  by  the  designated  or  directing  battalion, 
as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  IGO  and,  following; 
but  in  the  others,  all  the  divisions  will  face  to  the 
right,  and  the  chief  of  the  first  division,  in  each  of 
these  battalions,  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his 
right  guide. 


KVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    II.        17 

74.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general  will 
add: 

3.  March  (or  douUe-quick — March). 

75.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  battalion  will  ploy  it  in  rear  of  its  first  division, 
as  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  1G5  and  following. 

76.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will,  in  like  manner, 
ploy  his  battalion  from  a  halt,  in  rear  of  its  rigiit 
division ;  but,  pending  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment, this  division  will  stand  faced  to  the  flank  ;  the 
second  and  third  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its 
chief,  will  be  halted  as  it  successively  takes  its  place 
in  the  battalion  column,  the  chief  remaining  by  the 
side  of  his  right  guide;  the  fourth  will  enter  in  like 
manner,  and  when  its  head  shall  be  at  eight  or  ten 
paces  from  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel 
will  command :  \.  Battalion,  foncard ;  2.  Guide  left, 
and  8.  March  (or  double-quick — March);  at  the 
moment  the  right  guide  of  this  division  is  abreast  with 
the  others. 

77.  At  .the  command  march,  each  battalion  thus 
formed  in  mass  will  put  itself  in  march,  directing 
itself  to  the  rear  toward  its  point  of  entrance  into 
the  general  column ;  its  first  division,  conducted  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  take  the  shortest  line  tow- 
ard that  point;  the  other  divisions  will  each  conform 
its  movement  to  that  of  the  first,  marching  abreast 
with  it,  and  preserving  exactly  the  distance  of  six 
paces  from  one  guide  to  the  next;  arrived  at  twelve 
or  fourteen  paces  from  the  general  column,  the  first 
division  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  so  as  to  enter 
the  column  perpendicularly,  and  leave  a  distance 
equal  to  the  front  of  a  division  between  its  guide  and 
the  rear  rank  of  the  last  division  of  the  preceding 
battalion  ;  the  other  divisions  will  direct  themselves 
parallelly  to  the  first,  and  enter  successively  into  the 

2 


18         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BKIGADK — VXKT    11. 

general  column.  The  chiefs  of  division  being  up  with 
the  left  guides  of  the  column,  will  each  halt  in  his 
own  jK-rson,  see  his  division  file  past,  and  conform 
liiraself,  in  halting  and  aligning  it,  to  what  is  prescrib- 
ed in  the  S.  B.,  Xos.  16  7-9. 

78.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will 
detach  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  advance,  to 
indicate  the  point  of  entrance  into  the  column  for 
his  first  division,  and  as  each  of  his  guides  successively 
arrives,  he  will  assure  him  on  the  direction. 

79.  The  general,  or  officer  charged  with  the  execu- 
tion of  his  orders,  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
left  guide  of  the  directing  division,  to  superintend 
the  formation  of  the  general  column,  and  to  see  that 
the  left  guides  accurately  cover  each  other.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  plo'/ments,  whatever  the  division 
on  which  they  may  be  executed. 

80.  The  line  will  be  ployed  in  front  by  the  same 
commands,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right  in 
front. 

81.  In  this  case  the  first  battalion  will  execute  the 
movement  in  the  manner  indicated  in  the  ^S".  B.,  No. 
178  and  following. 

82.  The  other  battalions  will  each  execute  the 
movement  in  like  manner,  conforming  itself  to  what 
follows:  the  first  division,  which  will  have  faced  to 
the  right  with  the  others,  will  remain  by  the  flank 
while  the  battalion  is  ploying  in  front  of  it;  tlic 
second  and  third,  after  having  taken  position  in  the 
battalion  column,  will  be  halted  by  their  chiefs,  who 
will  remain  by  the  sides  of  their  right  guides,  and 
when  the  head  of  the  fourth  shall  be  at  eight  or  ten 
paces  from  the  right  flank  of  the  c:olumn,  the  colonel, 
observing  the  order  of  time  indicated  No.  76,  will 
command:  \.  Battalion  forward ;  2.  Guide  right ;  3. 
Maucii  (or  double-quick — March). 

83.  At  the  command  march,  each  battalion,  direct- 


IS- 


ut 
of 
its 
ed 
•ill 


is- 
as 

CO- 


y»l    2 £vo  LUTi  UN S     Orfi    BR  10  A  O £-. 

I  li|w«|ll 


I 


//A 


iiir  ii  n  tiii 


If 

Is 

3  J' 

«C1 

m 

8 

^ 

\' 

i';-'^ 

f 

-■3  £ 

ii  Hi  || 


<H 

vV  / 

is 

ii  / .  I 
Ii  ^ 

if      ^ 


i?.s 

fii 

S  'S 

5.5 

<N 

'^.? 

x^ 

^C 

i^*^ 

^ 

.^3.^ 

^^•s 

Si?:? 

^^•r 

EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADl': — PART    II.         19 

ing  itself  diagonally  to  the  front,  instead  of  to  the 
rear,  will  be  conducted  and  established  in  the  general 
column,  with  slight  variations,  as  prescribed  No.  77; 
arrived  at  twelve  or  fourteen  paces  from  the  flank  of 
that  column,  the  head  of  the  first  division  will  incline 
to  the  right  instead  of  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  per- 
pendicularly, and  to  take  its  division  distance;  the 
other  divisions  Avill  conform  themselves  to  the  move- 
ment of  the  lirs',  and  the  chiefs  of  the  whole  will 
each  conduct  his  division  till  its  head  is  nearly  up 
with  the  right  guides  of  the  general  column  ;  he  will 
then  halt  his  division,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  align 
it  by  the  right,  its  right  guide  having  faced  to  the  rear 
in  placing  himself  on  the  direction. 

84.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  78. 

So.  As  each  battalion  takes  its  position  in  the  col- 
umn in  front  of  the  directing  division,  its  colonel  will 
command  :  Ouiclc:^,  ahou.l — Fack. 

8(5.  To  ploy  the  line  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  (or  last)  division  of  the  fourth  battalion,  the 
general  will  command : 

1.  Close  column  by  dicision.  2.  On  the  fourth  divis- 
ion, fourth  battalion,  left  (or  I'ir/hl)  in  front.  3. 
March  (or  double-quick — March). 

87.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  given  in  tiie  two  preceding  cases,  but; 
by  inverse  means :  the  fourth  (or  last)  division  of 
each  subordinate  battalion,  being  the  first  to  take  its 
position  in  the  general  column,  it  will  be  conducted 
by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  the  other  divisions  will 
regulate  themselves  by  it. 

88.  If,  instead  of  ploying  the  line  on  the  first  divis- 
ion, right  battalion,  or  the  last  division  of  the  left,  as 
in  all  the  preceding  cases,  the  general  wishes  to  exe- 


20         KVOLUTIOXS    OF    A    RRI(JA1>K — PART    II. 

cute  the  movement  on  tlic  first  or  last  division  of  any 
other  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column  hy  dirision.  2.  <)n  the  first  (or  fourth') 
division  (such)  battalion,  right  (or  left)  in  front. 
3.  Marcu  (or  double-quick — March). 

80.  Whether  the  right  or  left  is  to  he  in  front,  the 
designated  or  directing  battalion  w)\\  execute  its 
movements  as  if  it  were  alone. 

90.  If  the  right  is  to  be  in  front,  all  the  battalions 
in  line  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one  will  execute 
the  movement  as  is  indicated  for  ploying  the  line  to 
the  front  on  the  left  division,  and  the  left  battalions 
will  execute  the  movement  as  is  indicated  for  ploying 
to  the  rear  on  tlic  right  division.  If  the  left  of  the 
line  is  to  be  at  the  head  of  the  column,  the  right  bat- 
talions will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed 
ibr  ploying  the  line  to  the  i'earon  the  leit  division,  and 
the  other  battalions  to  what  is  prescribed  for  ploying 
to  the  front  on  the  right  division. 

91.  If  the  directing  battalion  ploys  on  its  first,  or 
last  division,  the  battalion  contiguous  to  the  directing 
division  will  execute  its  movement  on  this  division; 
accordingly,  the  last  or  first  division  of  the  con-^iguous 
battalion,  instead  of  remaining  at  a  halt,  will,  at  the 
commencement  of  the  movement,  file  into  the  general 
column,  at  division  distance  in  iront  or  rear  of  the 
directing  division. 

92.  If  the  line  should  be  in  march,  and  the  gen- 
eral should  wish  to  ploy,  without  halting,  it  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in 
the  S.  B.,  observing  what  follows:  As  soon  as  each 
battalion  has  finished  its  ployment  while  marching,  it 
will  be  faced  by  a  fiank,  and  conducted  to  its  proper 
position  in  column. 


EVOLUTIONS    or    A    JJKIGADK — PART    III.        21 

nEMAUKS  OX    PLOYING    A    M\K    INTO    A    COLUMN    CLOSED    IN 

MASS. 

93.  In  the  several  ploymentsthe  njencral  will  take, 
in  pi-eference,  as  tlie  directing  division,  that  of  the 
right  or  left  of  the  battalion  on  which  the  movement 
is  to  be  executed. 

94.  This  method  of  ploying  a  line  into  column 
unites  several  advantages  :  ^/\s-t,  it  maintains,  pend- 
ing the  execution  of  the  movement,  the  battaHons  in 
all  their  strength,  as  each  forms  a  separate  mass; 
secorid,  it  occupies  the  least  possible  time,  as  each 
battalion  moves  over  the  shortest  time  to  its  place  in 
the  general  column. 


22         EVOLUTIONS    or    A    lUtlCiADtl — I'AUT    III. 

PART  TIIIED. 
Article  I. 

To  niai'ch  in  column  at  full  distance. 

95.  The  General,  wishing  to  put  the  column  in 
march,  will  indicate  to  the  colonel  of  the  leading  bat- 
talion the  direction  to  be  taken  by  the  headmost 
guide,  and  the  colonel  will  immediately  prescribe  to 
this  guide  the  means  to  be  employed  to  assure  the  di- 
rection of  the  march,  according  to  the  principles  es- 
tablished in  the  S.  B.,  Nos.  216-18. 

96.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general  will 
command  : 

1.   Column,  forward. 

97.  The  colonels  Laving  repeated  this  command, 
will  immediately  add  :  Guide  left,  if  the  right  be  in 
front,  or  Guide  rif/Jit,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

98.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March.) 

99.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapidity, 
the  column  will  put  itself  in  march. 

100.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
maintain  himself  on  the  direction  which  has  been  in- 
dicated to  him  by  tlie  means  prescribed  in  the  .S.  B.^ 
and  the  following  guides  Avill  each  march  in  the  trace 
of  the  one  who  immediately  precedes  him,  without 
regard  to  the  general  direction. 

101.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  leading  battal- 
ion will  see  that  the  headmotit  guide  does  not  deviate 
from  the  direction  he  ought  to  pursue,  and  the  same 
officer  of  each  following  battalion  will  albo  see  that  his 


EVOLUTIONS    or    A    BRIGADE — I'ART    III.        '23 

leading  guide  preserves  a  distance  equal  to  the  front 
of  his  subdivision  and  twenty-two  paces,  which  ought 
to  separate  the  battalions. 

102.  When  a  column  has  to  prolong  its  march  on  a 
given  line  in  order  to  form  upon  it  to  the  left  (or  right) 
into  line  of  battle,  the  general  will  always  cause  that 
line  to  be  marked  by  one  of  the  means  prescribed  in 
the  S.  B.y  Nos.  228-30. 

Artiolk  II. 
Column  in  route. 

103.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  general 
wish  to  put  it  in  march  in  the  route  step,  he  will  give 
the  commands  prescribed  for  the  march  in  the  ca- 
denced  step,  with  this  difference — the  command 
vinrch  will  be  preceded  by  that  of  route  step,  which 
will  be  repeated  by  the  colonels. 

104.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  general,  in 
order  to  cause  it  to  pass  from  the  cadenced  to  the 
route  step,  and  the  reverse,  will  give  the  commands 
prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  Nos.  315  and  317. 

105.  All  the  principles  relative  to  columns  in  route 
having  been  developed  in  the  schools  of  the  company 
and  battalion,  it  only  remains  to  add  here  that,  when 
a  column  of  many  battalions  encounters  a  defile, 
which  obliges  it  to  diminish  the  front  of  subdivisions, 
this  movement  will  only  be  made  as  each  battalion 
successively  arrives  on  the  ground  at  which  the  pre- 
ceding battalion  had  executed  it. 

10  3.  Thus,  for  example,  a  column  formed  by  com- 
pany, encountering  a  defile  which  will  only  receive 
the  front  of  a  platoon,  the  colonel  of  the  leading  bat- 
talion, will  at  once,  or  successively,  according  to  the 
order  of  the  general,  diminish  front  by  platoon  ;   but 


24        INVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — PART    III. 

the  colout'l  of  the  next  battalion  -will  not  repeat  the 
commands  of  the  prcceiliiig  colonel  until  his  Isat- 
tnlion  ariives  at  the  same  point,  and  so  on  of  the 
otiiei's. 

107.  The  chief  of  the  column  will  take  care  to  reg- 
ulate the  rate  of  the  march  according  to  the  ground 
and  other  circumstances  ;  he  will  always  leave  with 
the  rear  of  the  column  an  aide-de-camp  to  bring  him 
prompt  intelligence  in  case  it  find  a  dilHculty  in  fol- 
lowing. 

REMARKS. 

0-108.  If  the  companies  of  skirmishers  are  in  the  col- 
umn, the  distances  between  the  battalions  will  be 
estimated  from  those  companies.  Each  battalion  suc- 
ceeding the  first  will  get  its  distance  by  stopping 
short ;  on  resuming  the  cadenced  step,  these  battal- 
ions will  regain  their  distances  by  an  increased 
pace. 

Article  III. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

109.  The  general,  wishing  to  cause  the  column  to 
change  direction,  will  despatch  an  aide-de-camp  to 
the  point  of  change,  and  give  notice  of  his  purpose 
to  the  leading  colonel  a  little  before  arriving  at  that 
point. 

110.  The  change  of  direction  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  "B., 
No.  275  and  following. 

111.  Those  rules  will  be  observed  in  columns  in 
manoeuvre,  although  marching  at  the  moment  in  the 
route  step. 


EVOLUTIONS   01<-   A    BRIGADE — PAIIT    III.       25 

Article  IV. 
To  halt  the  column. 

112.  The  general  wishing  to  halt  the  column,  will 
command : 

1.   Column. 

113.  This  having  been  repeated,  he  will  add  : 

2.  Halt. 

114.  This  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest  ra- 
pidity. 

115.  The  column  being  halted,  if  the  general  wish 
to  form  it  to  the  left  (or  ru^ht)  into  line  of  battle^  and 
the  guides  require  to  be  assured  on  the  direction,  he 
will  place  biaiself  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  front  of 
the  head,  facing  to  the  rear  toward  the  direction 
which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  guides,  selecting  in 
rear  of  the  column  the  second  point  which  determines 
that  direction,  and  establishing  on  It  the  leading 
guide ;  he  will  then  command  : 

Guides^  cover. 

116.  At  this,  repeated  by  the  colonels,  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonels and  senior  majors  will  promptly  cause 
the  guides  who  may  noc  be  on  the  direction  to  cover 
each  other  accurately. 

117.  The  subdivision  guides  being  established  on 
the  direction,  the  colonels,  without  waiting  for  each 
other,  will  immediately  command :  Left  {or  ricjht) — 
Dress. 

118.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
division, each  subdivision  will  incline  to  its  guide,  and 
be  promptly  aligned.     If  the  new  direction  be  such 


•2G        KVi>r,U  I  IONS    01'    A    nUIGADK  —  TART    III. 

tliat  a  subdivision  find  itself  many  paces  from  it,  the 
chief  of  the  subdivision  will  cause  it  to  march  by  the 

flank. 


119.  As  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  232,  the  subdi- 
visions of  a  column  will  not  maintain  the  full  distance. 

Article  V. 
To  close  the  column  to  half-distance,  or  in  mass. 

1 20.  Whether  the  column  be  formed  by  company 
or  by  division,  the  distance  between  battalions,  when 
the  subdivisions  arc  at  half-distanc(;  from  each  other, 
or  closed  in  mass,  will  be  equal  to  the  front  of  a  sub- 
division. 

Int.    To  close  the  column  on  the  leadinfj  comjjnui/. 

121.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and 
rio;ht  in  front,  being  in  march,  when  the  general  shall 
wish  to  close  it  to  platoon  distance,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  half-distance,  close  column. 

1 22.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
add  : 

2.  March  (or  douUe-quick — March). 

123.  At  the  command  march,  the  headmost  battal- 
ion will  close  up  to  platoon  distance  on  its  leading 
company,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  295  and 
following. 

124.  The  other  battalions  will  continue  to  march  ; 
when  the  leading  company  of  the  second  battalion  is 
at  company  distance  from  the  rearmost  company  of 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    III.        27 

the  first  battalion,  its  captain  "vvill  halt  it  and  align  it 
by  the  left ;  the  other  companies  of  this  battalion  will 
close  up  on  the  leading  one,  and  the  following  battal- 
ions will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  just  prescrib- 
ed for  the  second. 

125.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  first  battalion 
will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  as  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B. 

126.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  following  bat- 
talion will  go  in  advance  to  the  point  at  which  his 
leading  company  ought  to  be  halted,  and  he  will 
asnire  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  placing  himself 
in  rear  of  each,  as  the  companies  are  successively 
closed. 

127.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  in  march,  be 
at  a  halt,  the  general  will  cause  it  to  close  by  the 
same  commands.  At  the  word  march.,  the  leading 
subdivision  will  stand  fast;  all  the  others  will  put 
themselves  in  movement,  and  the  battahons  will  close 
up  as  just  prescribed  for  a  column  in  march. 

128.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double-quick 
time,  it  will  close  by  the  commands  and  means  above 
indicated,  and  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B. 

2d.    To  close  the  cuhnnn  on  the  rearmost  contjiavi/. 

129.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  the  general,  if  he 
wish  to  close  it  to  half-distance  on  the  rearmost  com- 
pany, will  command : 

1.   On   (such  company)  fourth   battalion,  to  half-dis- 
tance, close  column. 

130.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
command:  1.  Battalion,  about — Face;  2.  Column, 
forward;    3.   Guide  riyht. 


28      i:voh:tions  of  a  niuGADi:— i'akt  hi. 

131.  At  the  first  command  of  its  colonel,  tlic  bat- 
talion will  face  about ;  each  guide  will  remain  abreast 
with  the  front  rank,  bei,'ome  the  rear;  the  rearmost 
company  of  the  fourth  battalion  will  remain  fiiced  to 
the  front. 

132.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  of*  the 
fourth  battalion  will  place  themselves  two  paces  out- 
side of  their  guides ;  those  of  the  other  battalions 
will  remain  behind  the  centres  of  their  companies. 

133.  The  general  will  then  add : 

2.  March  (or  douhle-qukk — March). 

134.  At  the  command  jnarcJi,  the  fourth  battalion 
will  close  on  its  rearmost  company,  as  prescribed  irf 
the  »S'.  B.,  No.  317  and  following. 

135.  The  other  battalions  will  close  on  the  fourth, 
and  when  the  colonel  of  the  third  sees  that  the  first 
company  of  the  fourth  battalion  has  only  a  few  paces 
left  to  take,  he  will  command  :  Captains,  on  the  Jiank 
of  the  column.  At  this,  the  captains  of  the  third  bat- 
talion will  ])lace  themselves  briskly  outside  of  their 
guides.  When  the  eighth  company  of  this  battalion 
is  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it, 
face  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  left,  its  guide 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear ;  the  other  companies  will 
close  upon  this  company,  and  the  remaining  battal- 
ions will  each  execute  what  is  just  prescribed  for  the 
third. 

136.  Each  colonel  will  face  his  puldes  to  the  front 
as  soon  as  all  the  companies  of  his  battalion  are 
aligned. 

137.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion 
will  assure  the  position  of  his  guides,  as  indicated  in 
the  S.  i>'.,  No.  324  ;  the  lieutenant-colonels  of  the 
other  battalions  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  126. 


EVOLUTIONS    or    A    BRIGADK  — TART    III.        '2U 

138.  If  the  column  be  in  marcli,  it  -vvill  be  closed  by 
tlie  commands  and  means  above  indicated,  and 
agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  B. 

Zd.    To  close  the  column  on  au  interior  battalion, 

139.  The  general,  wishing  to  close  the  column  on 
the  headmost  company  of  an  interior  battalion,  say 
the  third,  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  Jirsi  company ^  third   battalion,  to  half-dis- 
tance,  close  column. 

140.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of 
each  battalion  in  iront  of  the  third  will  command : 
1.  Baltalion,  about — Fack  ;  2.  Column,  forward  ;  3. 
Guide  right.     The  general  will  then  add : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

141.  At  the  command  march,  bi-iskly  repeated  by 
all  the  colonels,  the  third  battalion,  and  those  in  its 
rear,  will  close  up  as  prescribed  No.  123  and  follow- 
ing, for  the  execution  of  the  movement  on  the  head 
of  the  column ;  the  battalions  in  front  of  the  third 
will  close  as  indicated  No.  134  and  following,  for 
the  execution  of  the  movement  on  the  rear  of  the 
column;  the  eighth  company,  second  battalion,  will 
close  on  the  directing  company,  leaving  the  interval 
prescribed  No.  120. 

142.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  subdivisioa  on 
which  it  is  closed  will  halt  at  the  command  march, 
and  the  subdivisions  in  rear  will  close  in  the  manner 
presci-ibed  for  closing  on  the  head  of  the  column,  and 
the  subdivisions  in  front  in  the  manner  prescribed  for 
clbsin^  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 


80        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    IJHIGADK  —  PAUT    III. 


143.  A  column  by  division  -will  close  to  company 
distance  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 

144.  The  column  being  at  full  or  half-distance,  the 
general  Avill  cause  it  to  close  in  mass  by  the  same 
commands,  substituting  the  indication  culumn,  close 
in  mass, .for  that  of  to  half-distance,  close  column. 

145.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  execute  those 
several  movements  according  to  the  same  principles. 
If  the  column  closes  on  any  subdivision  in  rear  of  the 
battery,  this  latter,  before  the  movement  commences, 
and  ui)on  an  intimation  from  the  general,  will  leave 
the  column,  and  following  the  movement  upon  tho_ 
Hank,  will  resume  its  place  in  the  column,  Avhen  the 
manoeuvre  is  finished.  The  colonels  of  the  battalions 
next  the  battery  will  be  careful  to  preserve  the  nec- 
essary interval,  prescribed  No.  21 G. 

Article  VI. 

To  inarch  in  column  at  half-distance,  or  closed  in  mass. 

14G.  A  column  at  half-distance  or  in  mass,  being 
at  a  halt,  when  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march,  he' will  give  the  counnauds  prescribed  above 
for  putting  in  march  a  column  at  full  distance. 

147.  The  means  of  direction  indicated  for  a  column 
at  full  distance  will  be  the  same  for  a  column  at  half- 
distance  or  in  mass. 

148.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
in  march,  the  general  will  halt  it  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  if  it  were  a  column  at  full  distance. 

149.  The  column  at  half-distance  or  in  mass  being 
halted,  if  the  general  shall  wish  to  give  a  general  di- 
rection to  the  guides,  he  will  conform  to  the  means 
prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 


r 


e/OLt/r/o/^s  or  A   BffdAC^e 


1^        am-^      \    ^_        vfi^ 


niiiiii 


^%, 


^■li  ill 


KVOLUTIONS   OF    A    UKIGADK — PAra    ill.       31 
Articlk  VII. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  half-distance. 

150.  A  column  at  half-distance,  being  in  marcl), 
and  having  to  change  direction,  will  execute  tho 
movement  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance, 
with  the  diflerence  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  343. 

Articlk  VIII. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 
].s^   Fa  marching. 

151.  A  column  closed  in  mass,  being  in  march,  and 
having  to  change  direction,  the  general  will  cause 
the  point  at  which  the  change  has  to  commence  to 
be  marked,  and  just  before  arriving  at  the  point  will 
command : 

Change  direction  to  tlie  right  (or  left^. 

152.  This  command  having  been  repeated,  the 
colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will,  on  arriving  at  the 
point  indicated,  cause  his  battalion  to  change  direc- 
tion by  the  means  prescribed' in  the  ,S'.  i>.,"No.  345 
and  following. 

153.  The  second  battalion,  and  successively  the 
others,  will  change  direction  at  the  point  where  the 
first  changed,  and  in  the  same  manner. 

154.  If,  during  the  march  of  the  column,  the  gen- 
eral should  wish  to  give  a  new  point  of  direction,  too 
near  the  present  one  to  require  a  formal  change,  it 
will  be  done  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  >S^  J5., 
No.  285. 


B  i'  ,   O  Ji    O  £ 


iiiiliiriill,D 


■«  > 


FOLDOUT  BLANK 


32        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADF. — PART    III. 

2d.    To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

155.  The  column  being  halted,  wlicn  the  general 
shall  wish  to  place  it  in  a  new  direction,  without  any 
immediate  intention  of  advancing  after  such  change, 
he  will  cause  this  movement  to  be  execiited  by  the 
flanks  of  subdivisions  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  >S'.  B. 

156.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  the 
right  in  front,  and  that  it  has  to  change  direction  to 
the  left ;  the  general,  after  having  caused  two  mark- 
ers to  be  established  on  the  new  direction  for  the 
leading  subdivision,  will  command  : 

1.  Charirje  direction  by  the  right  flank. 

157.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
command  :  Battalion.,  right — Face.  The  general  will 
then  add : 

2.  March  (or  douhle-quich — March). 

158.  At  this,  the  column  will  march  by  the  right 
flank  into  the  new  direction,  in  conformity  with  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  3G7  and  fol- 
lowing. 

159.  The  colonels  will  see,  pending  the  execution 
of  the  movement,  that  the  files  do  not  open  out,  that 
the  subdivisions  enter  in  a  square  with  the  new  di- 
rection, and  that  the  prescribed  distance  between 
their  battalions  be  exactly  observed. 

IGO.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  leading  bat- 
talion will  place  himself  some  paces  in  front,  and  face 
to  the  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  of  the  column,  in 
order  to  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides  of  his  bat- 
talion ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  eacli  of  the  follow- 


K VOLUTIONS    OF    A    BKIGADi: — I'ART    III.        I',:', 

ing  battalions  -will  place  himself  successively  behind 
its  left  guides  as  they  arrive  on  the  new  direction,  to 
assure  them  in  their  positions. 

161.  A  column  in  mass  will  change  direction  to  the 
right  by  invers;e  means,  and  be  conducted  by  the  left 
Hank  into  the  new  direction. 

Article  IX. 

Being  in  coltimn  at  half-distance,  or  closed  in  mass, 
to  take  distances. 

1st.    To  take  di'iftauccif  hi/  the  head  of  the  column. 

162.  A  column  by  company  being  at  half-distance 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  general  shall  wish  it  to  take 
distances  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  of 
the  leading  battalion  the  point  of  direction  in  front, 
and  then  command  : 

By  the  head  of  column^  take  ivheelmg  distance. 

1G3.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  first  battalion 
will  take  its  distances  by  the  means  indicated  in  the 
S.  B.,  No.  .387  and  following. 

104.  Each  of  the  other  battalions  will  take  its  dis- 
tances in  like  manner  ;  but  it  will  not  commence  its 
movement  till  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion 
immediately  preceding  has  left,  besides  the  space 
equal  to  the  front  of  a  company,  the  distance  of 
twenty-two  paces. 

165.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  it  will  take  dis- 
tances according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
.S'.  B.,  and  by  the  commands  above  indicated. 

2d.    To  take  dintances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

166.  The  column  beinsi  at  half-distance  and  at  a 


34        KVOLUTIONS    01     A    BRIGADE — PART    III. 

halt,  when  the  frcncral  sliall  wish  it  to  take  distances 
on  the  ri'arniost  coippany,  say  the  eijihth  oonipany, 
fourtli  battalion,  he  ■will  fi?\st  determine  the  direction 
of  the  line  of  battle,  and  direct  two  markers  to  be 
placed  on  this  line,  as  prescribed  in  the  N.  B.,  No. 
;S97.  The  marker?  bcine:  established,  he  will  cause 
this  line  to  be  prolonjicd  by  one  of  the  means  indi- 
cated in  the  S.  B.,  No.  229  and  folIowlnLS  and  as 
soon  as  these  dispositions  are  made  he  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  eighth  company,  fourth  battalion,  take  wheel- 
ing distance, 

167.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonels  will 
each  command  :  1.   Column,  fitvicard  ;  2.   Guide  I  eft. 

168.  At  this,  the  captains  of  the  fourth  battalion 
•will  place  themselves  on  the  left  flank  of  the  column  ; 
those  of  the  other  battalions  Avill  remain  before  the 
centres  of  their  companies. 

169.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  senior  major 
of  the  first  battalion  will  remain  in  their  places  in 
column;  in  the  other  battalions  each  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  ))lace  himself  abreast  with  his  rearmost 
company,  and  the  senior  majors  each  abreast  with  his 
first. 

170.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March  (ov  douhle-quick — March). 

171.  At  this,  the  whole  column,  except  the  direct- 
ing company,  Avill  step  olf ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  of 
the  first  battalion  will  take  care  to  direct  the  leading 
guide  a  little  within  the  line  of  battle. 

172.  The  fourth  battalion  will  take  its  distances  as 
prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  398  and  following. 

173.  When  the  colonel  of  the  third  sees  that  only 
one  company  of  the   fourth  remains  to  take  its  dis- 


EVOLUTfOXS    OF    A    IHUGADE — PART    III.        35 

tauce,  lie  will  command :  Captains,  on  the  Jiank  of 
the  column. 

174.  At  this,  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
outside  of  their  guides  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
hasten  to  the  ])oint  whei'C  his  rearmost  company- 
ought  to  be  halted,  observing  to  take,  between  it 
and  the  first  company  of  the  fourth  battalion,  a 
distance  equal  to  the  front  of  a  company,  and  twenty- 
two  paces. 

1 75.  When  his  rearmost  company  shall  arrive 
abreast  with  the  lieutenant-colonel,  its  captain  will 
bait  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  companies 
of  the  third  will  take  their  distances  as  prescribed  for 
those  of  the  fourth  battalion. 

176.  The  remaining  battalions  will  successively 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  first  will  direct  the 
march  of  its  leading  guide  to  the  point  where  the 
rearmost  company  of  this  battalion  ought  to  be  halted, 
and  then  the  senior  major  will  replace  him  momen- 
tarily at  the  head  of  the  column. 

177.  The  colonels,  lieutenant-colonels,  and  senior 
majors  Avill  conform  themselves  to  v/hat  is  prescribed 
for  each  in  the  »S'.  B.,  Nos.  405-7. 

'6d.    To  take  distanccfi  on  the  head  of  the  columiu 

1 78.  When  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  distances 
to  be  taken  on  the  head  of  the  column,  say  the  first 
company,  of  the  first  battalion,  he  will  direct  two 
markers  to  be  placed  on  the  line  of  direction  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  B.,  No.  408,  and  cause  this  line  to 
be  prolonged  to  the  rear  by  the  means  indicated  in 
the  S.  B.,  No.  229  and  following;  these  dispositions 
being  made,  he  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  Jirst  company,   first  battalion,  take  wheeling 
distance. 


ii(j        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    15KU;A1)K — VAUV    III. 

179.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
command:  1.  Battalion,  about — Fack;  2.  Column, 
fonvanl ;  3.   Guide  right. 

180.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  of  the 
first  battalion  will  place  themselves  on  the  directing 
ilank  of  the  column;  those  of  the  other  battalions 
■will  remain  behind  the  centres  of  their  companies. 

181.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion 
■will  place  himself  abreast  with  his  now  leading  com- 
pany, and  the  senior  major  abreast  with  its  rearmost 
one;  in  the  other  battalions  the  positions  of  the 
lieutenant-colonels  and  senior  majors  will  be  the  re- 
verse. 

182.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  Mauch  (or  douUe-quick—^lxRCii). 

183.  At  this,  the  whole  column,  except  the  direct- 
ing company,  which  has  not  faced  about,  will  step  ofT'; 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion,  placed 
by  the  side  of  the  guide  of  its  now  leading  company, 
Avill  take  care  to  direct  this  guide  a  little  within  the 
line  of  battle. 

184.  The  first  battalion  will  take  its  distances  in 
the  manner  indicated  in  the  S.  7J.,  No.  401)  and  fol- 
lowing. 

185.  When  the  last  company  but  one  of  the  first 
battalion  shall  have  taken  its  distance,  the  colonel  of 
the  second  will  command :  Captains,  on  the  Jlank  of 
the  column;  at  the  same  time,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
of  this  battalion  wmU  go  to  the  point  at  which  the  first 
company  ought  to  be  halted. 

18().  This  company  having  arrived  abreast  with 
the  lieutenant-colonel,  its  captaiii  will  halt  it,  face  it 
about,  and  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  other  companies 
of  this  battalion  will  take  their  distances  as  prescribed 
for  those  of  the  first  battalion. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    UUIGADE — rART    HI.        87 

187.  Each  remaining  battalion  will  conform  itself 
to  what  has  just  been  proscribed  for  the  second. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  fourth  will  direct  the 
march  of  its  leading-  guide  to  the  point  at  which  its 
now  rearmost  company  ouglit  to  be  halted,  Avhen  he 
will  change  })lace  with  the  senior  major. 

188.  The  field  officers  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed  for  each  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  417. 

4th.    To  taJ.-e  distances  on  an  inferior  battalion. 

1 80.  "When  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  distances 
to  be  taken  on  an  interior  company  of  the  column, 
say  the  first  company  of  the  third  battalion,  he  will 
establish  the  direction  in  tiie  manner  indicated  No. 
1 78,  and  caubC  it  to  be  prolonged  to  the  front  and  rear ; 
which  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

1.   On  the  Jirsl  company,  third  battalion.,  take  loheelincj 
distance. 

190.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
third  and  the  colonel  of  the  following  battalion  will 
each  command :  1.  Battalion,  about — Face;  2.  Col- 
umn, forward;  3.  Guide  right.  The  colonels  of  the 
battalions  in  front  of  the  third  will  each  command : 
1.   Column,  forward ;  2.   Guide  left. 

191.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

192.  The  third  and  fourth  battalions  will  execute 
their  movement  in  the  manner  indicated  No.  180  and 
followinff,  for'taking  distances  on  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn ;  the  third  will  conform  itself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, in  that  case,  for  the  first  battalion. 

103.  The  first  and  second  battalions  will  execute 


88        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    lUlICADK — PAUT    III. 

the  movement  as  prescribed  No.  168  and  following, 
for  taking  distances  on  the  rccn'of  the  colnmn.  At  the 
commencement  of  the  movement  the  second  bat- 
talion will  put  itself  in  march  with  the  rest,  and  its 
rearmost  company  will  be  halted  the  moment  there  is 
between  it  and  the  first  company  of  the  third  bat- 
talion a  distance  equal  to  the  .front  of  a  company 
and  twenty-two  paces. 

194.  When  distances  are  taken  on  an  interior  bat- 
talion of  the  column,  the  headmost  or  rearmost  com- 
pany of  this  battalion  will  be  designated  as  the  direct- 
ing company. 

195.  A  column  in  mass  will  take  full  distances  by 
the  commands  and  means  just  indicated.  AVhen  it 
has  to  take  half-distances  the  general  will  substitute, 
in  the  first  command,  the  indication  half  for  that  of 
wheeling  distance. 

196.  All  these  movements  Avill  be  executed,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  in  a  column  left  in 
front. 

197.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be 
taken  according  to  the  same  principles  as  in  a  column 
by  company. 

REMAnKS    ON    TAKING  DISTANCF.S. 

198.  When  the  column  takes  wheeling  distances 
on  any  of  its  subdivi.^ions,  or  by  the  head  of  the 
column,  the  general  will  first  dii-cct  the  battery  to 
leave  the  column,  and  will  then  close  the  interval 
which  it  occupied  by  causing  the  three  battalions, 
which  already  have  subdivision  intervals  between 
them,  to  close  to  subdivision  distance  upon  the  one 
which  is  isolated  ;  or  he  will  close  this  latter  upon  the 
others.  He  will  then  proceed  to  take  wheeling 
distances,  as  prescribed  No.  162  and  following. 


EA'OLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE— PART   III.       39 

Article  X. 
Countermarch. 

199.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  full  or  half- 
distance,  when  the  general  shall  wisli  to  cause  it  to 
execute  the  countermarch,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Countermarch. 

200.  This  being  repeated  by  all  the  colonels,  eacli 
will  immediately  command :  1 .  Battalion,  rinht — Face  : 
2.  Bi/fle  left. 

201.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-guick—'MAiicn). 

202.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  all  the  subdivisions 
of  the  column  will  execute  the  countermarch,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  B. 

203.  With  the  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

204.  When  a  column  in  mass  has  to  execute  the 
countermarch,  the  general  will  command  : 

1.  Countermarch. 

205.  This  being  briskly  repeated  by  all  the  colonels, 
each  will  immediately  command  :  1.  Battalion,  right 
and  left — Face  ;  2.  By  file,  left  and  right. 

20G.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 
207.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  subdivisions  will 


40        EVOLUTIONS    or    A    BR  I<  1 A  DK— I'AIM'    HI- 

pTit  thcm?clves  in  movement,  and  ihc  countermarch 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  7?.,  No.  426 
and  folloAving. 

AllTICLE    XT. 

Being  in  column  by  company,  to  form  divisions. 

208.  The  column  being  by  company,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  general  shall  wish  divisions 
to  be  formed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Form  divisions. 

209.  This  being  repeated  by  the  colonels,  each  will 
immediately  command  :  Left  cowpanies,  left — Face. 

210.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — IMarch). 

211.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  movement  will 
be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B. 

212.  Each  colonel  will  command  :  Guides — Posts, 
as  soon  as  the  divisions  of  his  battalion  are  formed. 

21.'?.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  general  will  give 
the  same  commands,  and  the  colonels  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  »S'.  />.,  No. 
455. 

214.  If  the  column  is  in  march,  divisions  will  be 
formed  by  the  commands  and  means  above  indicated, 
and  in  conibrmity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in 
the  >S'.  n. 

REMARKS  ON  THK  POSITION-OP  THK  BATTEHV  IN  THE  COLUMN. 

215.  In  marching  in  advance  in  thccadenccd  step, 
the  battery  of  the  brigade  will  take  post  directly  in 
rear  of  its  leading  battalion.     Marching  in   retreat, 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   A   BRIGADE— PART    III.       41 

the  battery  will  be  posted  directly  in  advance  of  its 
rearmost  battalion.  The  pieces,  in  these  cases,  will, 
in  column,  be  formed  four  abreast. 

216.  Before  putting  a  column,  either  by  division, 
or  company  closed  in  mass,  or  at  half-distance,  in 
march,  the  ijeneral,  after  giving  the  command,  Column^ 
forward^  will  cause  the  leading,  or  three  leading  bat- 
talions, as  the  march  is  in  advance,  or  retreat,  to  move 
forward,  the  distance  of  sixty,  or  one  hundred  paces, 
as  the  column  may  be  by  division,  or  company,  in 
order  that  the  battery  may  take  its  position  in  the 
column.  The  interval  thus  formed  for  the  battery 
will  be  one  hundred  and  forty  paces. 

217.  In  marching,  in  the  route  stej),  the  battery 
will  take  post  in  rear' of  the  column. 

POSITION    OF    THE    CAVALRY. 

218.  When  in  column,  the  cavalry  will  take  such 
position  either  in  front.  Hank,  or  rear,  as  the  general 
may  direct. 

4 


m- 


42         KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BKIGADK — PAUT    IV. 


PART  FOURTH. 

DIFFERENT  MODES  OF  PASSING  FROM  THE 
ORDER  IN  COLUMN  TO   ORDER  IN  BATTLE. 

AuTicM<:  I. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

219.  The  diflTerent  manners  of  determining  tlic  line 
of  battle  have  been  explained  in  the  S.  D. 

Akticle  II. 

Mode  of  passing  from  column  at  full  distance  into  line 
of  battle. 

To  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle. 

220.  The  column  being  supposed  to  have  the  right 
in  front,  -when  the  general  shall  -vvish  to  form  it  to 
tlie  left  into  line,  he  will  first  assure  the  direction  of 
the  guides  by  one  of  the  means  j)roscribed  No.  115 
and  following ;  -which  being  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Left  into  Hue,  icheel. 

221.  This  having  been  repeated  by  tlie  colonels, 
the  right  guide  of  the  comjiany  at  the  head  of  each 
battalion  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
left  guides,  in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  S.  JJ.,  No.  465 ;  the  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

222.  At   this,  briskly  repeated,  the   column  will 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — FART    IV.        43 

form  to  the  left  into  lino  of  battle,  and  the  moment  it 
is  formed  the  general  will  command  : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

223.  At  this,  the  guides  will  take  their  places  in 
line  of  battle. 

224.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  to  the  right 
into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

By  inversion,  to  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

22.5.  If  circumstances  require  that  a  column,  right 
in  front,  should  form  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle, 
the  general,  without  occupying  himself  with  rectify- 
ing the  right  guides  of  the  column,  will  command  : 

1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line,  toheel. 

226.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  left 
guide  of  every  company  at  the  head  of  a  battalion, 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
S.  B.,  No.  485. 

227.  The  colonels  having  repeated  the  above  com- 
mand, will  each  immediately  give  this :  Battalion, 
fjuide  right:  the  lieutenant -colonels  and  senior 
majors  will  rectify,  with  the  utmost  promptitude,  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  their  respective  bat- 
talions, without  occupying  themselves  with  the 
general  direction  of  the  column  ;  and  as  soon  as  these 
dispositions  are  made,  the  general  will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

228.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion  will 
wheel  up  into  line,  in  conformity  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B.,  No.  436. 


44        KVOLUTIONS    or    A    BRIG.VDK — PAKT    IV. 

229.  The  line  being  formed,  tlie  geaeral  will  com- 
mand : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

230.  If,  with  the  left  in  front,  it  be  necessary  to 
form  the  column  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles. 

231.  If  the  general  should  desire  to  march  forward 
without  halting  the  line  formed  from  the  column  on 
march,  it  will  be  executed  in  accordance  with  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the  *S'.  B. 

Successive  Formations. 

232.  In  the  successive  formations,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  each  subordinate  battalion  will  always 
precede  it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  establish  a 
marker  at  the  point  where  the  right  or  left  of  his 
leading  subdivision  is  to  rest.  He  will  take  care  to 
leave  between  this  marker  and  the  next  battalion  al- 
ready established  on  the  line,  the  interval  of  twenty- 
two  paces,  and  then  place  a  second  marker  on  the 
line  at  a  little  less  than  subdivision  distance  from  the 
first.  The  moment  the  lieutenant-colonel  detaches 
himself,  he  will  be  replaced  at  the  head  of  liis  column 
by  the  senior  major. 

233.  As  soon  as  the  color  subdivision  of  each  bat- 
talion arrives  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  color-bearer 
will  stop  out  and  place  himself  opposite  to  his  file  on 
the  alignment  of  the  guides  already  established  on 
that  line,  taking  care  to  hold  up  his  lance  perpendicu- 
larly between  liis  eyes. 

234.  As  soon  as  there  shall  be  two  colors  on  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonels  will  command:  Guides — 
Posts,  after  the  last  subdivision  of  their  battalions 
is  established  on  that  line ;   but  the  color-bearers  will 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   A   BRIGADE — PART    IV.        45 

remain  in  front  until  the  entire  line  is  formed.     The 
general  will  then  command  :  Colons — Posts. 

235.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  assure  with  the 
utmost  care  the  markers  of  their  respective  battalions 
on  the  line  of  battle,  taking  the  colors  as  the  basis  of 
alignment  as  soon  as  there  are  two  established  on 
that  line,  and  then  assure,  with  equal  precision,  the 
direction  of  the  following  guides  and  color-bearers 
as  they  successively  come  on  the  line  of  battle. 

236.  Each  colonel,  after  ordering  in  his  guides,  will 
cause  his  battalion  to  order  arms. 


Article  III. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half-dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  "]  ^ 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  I  into  line  of 

3.  Forward  by  deployment         f  battle. 

4.  Face  to  the  rear  J 

\8t.   Column  at  half-distance,  to  the  left  {or  right),  into  line 
of  battle. 

237.  A  column  at  half-distance  having  to  form  to 
the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the  general  will 
first  cause  it  to  take  distances  on  the  subdivision  he 
may  choose  to  designate,  by  the  means  prescribed 
No.  162  and  following;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  form  the  column  into  line  of  battle  as  indicated 
No.  220  and  following. 

238.  The  general,  when  he  judges  it  necessary, 
may  order  each  battalion  to  form  itself  into  line  of 
battle  as  it  shall  successively  have  its  distances,  with- 
out waiting  for  the  battalions  engaged  in  the  execu- 
tion of  this  preliminary  movement. 


4G         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRKJADF- — PART    IV. 

230.  If  the  column  be  in  marcli.  and  it  bo.  nocossaiy 
to  form  rapidly  into  line  of  battle,  the  gem-ral  will 
cause  it  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No. 
493  and  following. 

2d.    Column  at  half-dintnuoe  on  the  ri<jht  (or  on  the  left),  info 
line  of  battle. 

240.  A  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  being' 
in  march,  when  the  general  shall  wish  to  form  it  on 
the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  first  determine 
the  direction  of  that  line,  and  then  indicate  to  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  first  battalion  the  point 
where  the  right  is  to  rest;  this  officer  will  immediately 
detach  himst'lf  with  two  markers,  and  establish  them 
as  indicated  in  the  .s\  B.,  No.  501. 

2  41.  If  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be  not 
parallel,  or  nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  column,  the  gen- 
eral, a  little  in  advance,  will  take  care  to  direct  the 
march  of-  the  leading  subdivision  parallelly  to  that 
line,  by  the  means  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  525,  so 
that  its  guide,  after  turning  to  the  right,  may  have  at 
least  ten  paces  to  take  in  order  to  come  upon  it. 

242.  These  dispositions  being  made,  when  the  gen- 
eral shall  wish  the  movement  to  commence,  he  will 
command : 

On  the  right,  into  line. 

243.  This  having  been  repeated  by  the  colonels, 
each  will  add  :  Battalion,  guide  right. 

244.  The  leading  subdivision  liaving  arrived  op- 
posite to  the  marker  placed  at  the  point  d'appui, 
will  turn  to  the  right,  and  the  formation  into  line  of 
battle  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  505 
and  followini;. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        47 

245.  When  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second 
battalion  sees  the  last  subdivision  of  the  first  turn  to 
the  right,  in  order  to  move  upon  the  line,  he  will  de- 
tach himself  with  two  markers,  whom  he  will  establish 
on  the  direction  of  the  guides  of  the  first  battalion. 

246.  The  leading  subdivision  of  the  second  battalion 
having  arrived  opposite  to  the  first  marker,  will  turn 
to  the  right  at  the  command  of  its  captain,  who  will 
halt  it  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  and  align 
it  by  the  right  against  the  two  markers,  placed  in 
advance  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

247.  The  following  battalions  will  execute  their 
movement  as  just  prescribed  for  the  second. 

248.  The  line  being  formed,  the  general  will  com- 
mand: 

.  Colors — Posts. 


249.  At  this,  the  color-bearers  will  return  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

250.  The  general,  placed  at  the  point  (Vappui^  will 
see  that  the  colors  of  the  two  right  battalions  place 
themselves  correctly  on  the  direction  which  he  may 
have  determined  for  the  line  of  battle. 

251.  The  field  officers  will  conform  themselves, 
pending  the  formation  into  line  of  battle  of  their  re- 
spective battalions,  to  what  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  S.  ^.,Nos.  519,  520. 

2o2.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  formed  on  the 
left,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

253.  If  the  general  should  wish  to  commence  firing 
pending  the  execution  of  the  movement,  he  will  give 
an  order  to  that  eflcct,  aud  the  several  battalions  will 
successively  conforin  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B.^  No.  528.  This  rule  is  general  for  all 
successive  formalionf. 


48         i: VOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIG ADE— PART    IV. 
'id.   Column  at  lialf-distanr.e,  furioard  into  line  of  battle. 

254.  AVhen  a  column  at  half-distance,  riulit  in  front, 
sliall  an-ivc  behind  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it 
has  to  form  line  of  battle,  the  general  will  first  de- 
termine the  direction  of  that  lino,  either  at  right 
angles,  or  oblique  with  the  direction  of  the  column, 
and  then  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the 
leading  battalion  the  point  at  which  the  right  ought 
to  rest ;  this  officer  will  immediately  detach  himself 
with  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  the  direction 
indicated,  as  explained  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  501. 

255.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  general  will 
halt  the  column,  cause  "the  colonel  of  the  first  to 
establish  his  battalion  perpendicular  to  the  line,  if  not 
already  so,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Foricard  into  line. 

256.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  battalion  will  conmiand:  Column,  close  in  mass; 
the  other  colonels  will  each  command :  1.  Battalion^ 
guide  rif/ht ;  2.  Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

Ibl.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March — (or  double-quick — March). 

258.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  battalion 
will  close  in  mass,  and  then  dcjiloy  on  its  first  sub- 
division, by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  S.  7>.,  No. 
5G0  and  following. 

259.  The  remaining  battalions  will  march  in  col- 
umn, by  battalion,  toward  the  line  of  battle  ;  to  this 
end,  the  leading  subdivision  of  each  will  break  f)om 
tlie  general -column  by  a  wheel  to  the  left,  and  then 
direct  itself  diagonally  forward,  £o  as  to  arrive  op- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        49 

posite  to  the  point  (Vnppui  of  its  battalion,  but  distant 
irom  this  point  at  least  the  depth  of  the  battalion  in 
column. 

260.  The  head  of  eaeh  of  these  battalions  having 
ai'rived  opposite  its  point  (rap/mi,  ■will  turn  to  the 
riiiht,  in  order  to  advance  in  a  square  with  tiie  line  of 
battle,  and  when  it  shall  be  about  three  paces  from 
that  line  the  colonel  will  close  his  column  in  mass, 
and  deploy  it  on  its  first  subdivision.  Ji'  it  is  the 
wish  of  the  general  that  the  battalions  shall  remain 
in  column,  after  arriving  on  the  line,  he  will  so  direct 
the  colonels. 

261.  The  line  being  formed,  the  general  will  com- 
mand : 

Colors — Posts. 


262.  If  the  general  should  wish  to  form  forward,  into 
line  without  halting,  he  will  cause  the  line  to  be 
marked  in  advance,  and  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed No.  2.55  and  following,  and  the  principles  in- 
dicated *S'.  B.  Should  he  wish  to  continue  the  march 
without  halting,  the  line  will  not  be  marked  in  ad- 
vance, and  the  movement  will  be  executed  in  con- 
foimity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  same 
school. 


REBfABKS   ON  FORMING    FORWARD,  INTO  LINE  OF  BATTLE. 

263.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on 
the  diagonal  direction  taken  by  the  battalions  in 
passing  from  the  general  column  toward  the  line  of 
battle  ;  the  better  to  assure  this  direction,  the  general, 
colonels,  and  lieutenant-colonels  will  observe  the  fol- 
lowing rules : 

264.  Before  beginning  the  movement,  the  general 


50        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK— PART    IV. 

will  oliargc  two  aides-de-camp  to  determine  the  points 
iVappui  on  the  line  of  battle  lor  the  i'ig[ht  fl^inks  of  the 
(lilferent  battalions,  whieh  will  be  executed  as  follows. 

2Go.  The  first  aid  will  <jallop  to  battalion  distance, 
and  twent3'-two  paces  from  the  general,  placed  at 
tha  point  (Vappui^  and  face  to  hiin;  the  general  will, 
by  signal  of  the  sword,  align  him  on  the  point  of  di- 
rection to  the  left.  The  second  aid  will  gallop  at  the 
same  time  to  a  like  distance  behind  the  first,  lace  to 
the  right,  and  align  himself  on  the  first  aid  and  the 
general. 

2G6.  The  two  aids  being  thus  established  on  the 
line  of  battle,  the  general  will  cause  the  movement  to 
commence;  the  second  bat.talion  will  direct  itself  on 
the  first  aid,  and  the  third  on  the  second ;  when  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second  battalion  arrives  on 
the  line,  the  first  aid  will  gallop  to  battalion  distance 
and  twenty-two  paces  behind,  the  second  aitl,  and 
align  himself  on  tlie  latter,  and  the  color  to  the  right ; 
the  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  immediately  direct  his 
battalion  on  this  aid.  Accordingly,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  two  aids  will  thus  in  turn  place  themselves 
one  behind  the  other  at  battalion  distance  and  an  in- 
terval of  twenty-two  paces,  as  soon  as  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  the  battalioH,  which  directs  itself  on  either, 
comes  to  replace  him.  The  aides-de-camp  will  be 
careful  to  place  themselves  accurately  on  the  line  of 
battle,  and  at  the  true  distance  from  each  other. 

267.  From  the  commencement  of  the  movement, 
the  general,  or  the  officer  he  may  substitute,  will 
place  himself  at  the  point  (Vappui,  as  in  the  forma- 
tion- on  the  right,  into  line  of  battle,  and  for  the  like 
purpose. 

268.  Every  colonel  will  hold  himself  abreast  with 
his  leading  company  on  the  directing  flank,  pending 
the  march  ol  his  battalion  toward  the  line  of  battle  ; 
and  when  the  battalion  be^^ins  to  form,  he  will  con- 


EVQLOTI  B  hS  CFA   BRICAD£. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    JV.        51 

form  himself  to  whab  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No. 
590. 

269.  Each  lieutenant-colonel  -will  detach  himself, 
in  order  to  take  the  place  of  the  aid-de-camp  on  the 
line  of  battle,  when  the  head  of  his  battalion  is  at 
about  one  hundred  and  forty  paces  from  that  line,  and 
he  Avill  then  discharge  the  functions,  pending  the  for- 
mation of  his  battalion,  which  have  been  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B.,  No.  520. 

270.  A  column,  lefc  in  front,  arriving  behind  the 
left  of  the  line  of  battle,  will  form  forward  on  that 
line,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

4th.    Column    at  half-dlatauce  faced    to   the  rear,   into   line 
of  battle. 

271.  When  a  column  at  half-distance,  right  in  front, 
arrives  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it  has 
to  form  in  order  of  battle,  the  general  will  first  de- 
termine the  direction  of  that  line,  and  indicate  to  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  headmost  battalion  t\\Q  point 
d'appui  for  its  right;  this  officer  Avill  immediately 
detach  himself  with  two  markers,  and  establish  them 
on  the  direction  indicated,  as  explained  in  the  S.  B., 
No.  501. 

272.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at 
about  company  distance  from  the  markers,  the 
general  will  halt  the  column,  and  cause  the  leading 
subdivision  to  be  marched  and  dressed  again t  the 
markers,  in  the  manner  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  No. 
532.     He  will  then  command  : 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

273.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  will  immediately  command  :  Battalion,^  right — 
Face  ;  the  colonels  of  the  following  battalions  will 


52         KV0I.UT10N3    OK    A    URICAD!: — PART    IV. 

each  oommaiul :  1.  Battalion,  guide  lefl :  2.  Head  of  the 
cohaiiH  to  the  right. 

274.  The  general  -will  then  add: 

2.  March  (or  douhle-quick — Maucii). 

2  75.  This  being  briskly  repeated,  the  first  battalion 
■will  form  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  B.,  No.  536  and  following. 

27G.  The  remaining  battalions  will  march  in  column 
by  battalion,  toward  the  line  of  battle;  to  this  end, 
the  leading  subdivision  of  each  will  break  from  the 
general  column  by  a  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  bat- 
talion will  then  direct  itself  toward  the  line  of  battle, 
as  in  the  formation  /o?vrarr/,  into  line. 

2  77.  The  head  of  each  of  these  battalions  having 
arrived  opposite  its  point  d'appui,  will  turn  to  the  left, 
in  order  to  advance  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  battle; 
and  when  at  about  company  distance  from  that  line, 
on  which  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  have  established 
two  markers,  as  indicated  No.  232,  the  colonel  will 
halt  his  battalion,  and  cause  it  to  form  faced  to  the 
rear,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the  means  and  commands 
prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  531  and  following. 

278.  The  line  being  formed,  the  general  will  com- 
mand : 

3.  Colors — Posts. 

279.  The  general,  colonels,  and  lieutenant-colonels 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  267 
and  following. 

280.  A  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  before  the 
left  of  the  line  of  battle,  will  be  formed  faced  to  the 
rear,  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

281.  If  the  general  should  wish  to  form  into  line 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        53 

faced  to  the  roar,  without  haItln;Xf  he  will  cause  the 
line  to  be  marked  in  advance,  and  tlie  movement  will 
be  performed  accordinfr  to  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  No.  272  and  following,  and  the  principles 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  battalion. 

Article  IV. 

Column  closed  in  mass,  forward  into  line  of  battle,  or 
into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

282.  A  column  closed  in  mass,  will  be  formed  for- 
ward into  line,  or  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  a  column  at 
half-distance,  observing  what  follows.  If  the  move- 
ment is  forward  into  line,  at  the  first  command  by  tlie 
general  the  colonel  6f  the  first  battalion  will  com- 
mand:  On  the  first  (oY  last)  (subdivision)  deploy 
column;  the  other  colonels  will  each  command:  1. 
Guide  right  (ov  left).  2.  Battalion,  left  (or  right) 
roheel. 

Article  V. 

Formations  into  line   of   battle,   composed  of   two 
movements. 

283.  Habitually,  and  especially  in  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  the  formations  will  be  made  on  the  head 
of  the  column. 

284.  When,  from  peculiar  circumstances,  it  is  found 
necessary  to  form  a  column,  which  is  at  half-distance 
or  closed  in  mass,  right  or  left  in  front,  either  faced 
to  the  front  or  rear  into  line  on  any  battalion  other 
than  that  at  the  head  of  the  column,  the  formation 
will  be  executed  by  the  union  of  two  movements,  as 
will  be  explained. 

285.  In  the  first  case,  or  faced  to  the  front,  the 


54        EVOLUTIONS    or    A    BRIGADK— FART    IV. 

battalion  on  whicli  tlio  movement  is  made,  and  those 
in  its  rear,  will  form  forward  info  line  nfhatfle;  the 
other  battalions  will  countermarch,  andlbrm/ace(^  to 
the  rear  into  line  of  bailie. 

28G.  In  the  second  case,  the  column  having  to 
form  faced  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  the  battalion  on 
which  the  movement  is  made,  and  those  which  follow,* 
will  form  faced  lo  Ihe  rear  into  line  of  battle:  the  other 
battalions  Avill  countermarch,  and  form  forward  into 
line  of  battle. 

287.  These  movements  will  be  executed  by  the 
commands  and  means  already  explained,  observing 
what  follows.  The  general,  before  commencing  the 
movement,  will  cause  the  battalions  in  front  of  the 
hne  to  be  countermarched. 

Article  VI. 

Columns  closed  in  mass. 
Deployment  by  battalion  in  7nass. 

288.  The  brigade  column  in  mass  may  be  formed 
into  line  of  battle  by  deployment :  1st.  Faced  to  the 
front ;  2d.  Faced  to  the  rear;  3d.  Faced  to  the  left ; 
4th.  Faced  to  the  right ;  5th.  Oblique  to  the  front  or 
rear. 

l«^   Faced  to  the/rout. 

289.  The  general,  wishing  to  deploy  the  column 
faced  to  the  front,  will  first  determine  the  direction  of 
the  line  of  baltle,  and  cause  it  to  be  marked  by  one  of 
the  means  already  indicated,  taking  care,  if  the 
column  be  in  march,  to  cause  a  mounted  oflicer  to  be 
placed  on  that  line,  at  the  point  where  the  head 
of  tJie  column  ought  to  arrive. 

290.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  the  general,  before 


O.) 

the 
i  li- 
the 
)int 
■en- 
t  it 

the 
ass, 
ate, 
ttle 
the 
ion, 
ond 
ive, 
lion 

eral 

nhij 


'the 
The 

ft— 
:  1. 


\  tlie 
will 
ision 
]  by 
ther 


EVOLUTt  ONS     OF   A    8  P  ICAD  E 


^ 


^"! 


^"^ 


^^^ 


J''*  ^  /7 


'^'^. 


Zi,«^  o)'  baCttli  on.  third,  het-ttoc- 
■Iveru  }>/  hoLtca-lvon, 'Jn.  nCo.ss 
en.  5(,cond  (le.pZoy  cohvrrwj 
N'   5  2  2. 


fftt 


r^ViViit) 


..v^'^^-"\\ 


F-3    ^ 


\0^ 


•S^- 


KVOLUTIOXS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        55 

deploying  it,  will  est ablit<h  it  perpendicularly  to  tlie 
line  of  battle,  if  it  be  not  already  so,  by  the  means  in- 
dicated No.  149,  or  Ko.  155  and  followinix;  if  the 
column  be  in  march,  he  will  direct  it  on  the  point 
marked  as  above,  but  so  that  it  may  arrive  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  line  of  battle,  and  he  will  halt  it 
at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

291.  The  column  being  thus  established,  the 
general  will  cause  it  to  deploy  by  battalion  in  mass, 
on  whatever  battalion  he  may  choose  to"  designate, 
say  the  firt>t.  He  will  place  on  the  line  of  battle 
tAvo  markers,  the  first  before  the  right,  and  the 
second  befbi'e  the  left  file  of  the  headmost  division, 
and  then  order  a  mounted  officer  to  go  beyond 
the  point  at  whieh  the  left  battalion  will  arrive, 
and  to  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  basis  of  the  alignment. 

292.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  command : 

1.  By  battalif,n  m  mass,  in  the  Jirst  battalion,  dcplmj 
column. 

293.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  battalion  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast.  The 
colonel  of  the  second  will  command  :  Battalion,  left- 
Face.  The  other  colonels  will  each  command:  1. 
Guide  right.     2.  Battalion,  left  icheel. 

294.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March  (ot  double-quick — March). 

295.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the 
movement  will  commence  ;  the  colonel  of  the  first  will 
command:  R'lrjht — Dress;  at  which  the  first  division 
will  dress  up  against  theT  markers,  and  be  aligned  by 
the  right.     At  the  same  time,  the  guides  of  the  other 


5G         KVOLUTION3    OF    A    BRIGADE — PAUT    IV. 

divisions  will  cover  each  otlier  accurately,  each 
followiiifi  guide  taking  the  distance  of  six  paces  from 
the  guide  inimcdiati'ly  preceding  ;  the  senior  major 
will  establish  them  promptly  on  the  direction,  and,  as 
soon  as  Ihey  are  assured  in  their  positions,  each  chief 
ivill  align  his  division  by  the  right.  The  chief  of  the 
first  division,  after  having  commanded  front,  instead 
of  placing  himself  before  its  centre,  will  remain 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  right  guide 
will  fall  back  to  the  rear  rank. 

296.  The  second  battalion  will  march  straight-for- 
ward, and  when  it  arrives  opposite  its  place  it  will 
be  faced  by  the  right  flank,  and  moved  on  the  line; 
the  others  will  march  in  column  by  battalion,  toward 
the  line  of  battle,  directing  themselves  as  prescribed 
No.  259. 

297.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the 
senior  major  of  the  second  battalion  will  place  him- 
self twenty-two  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the 
column,  to  mark  the  point  at  which  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right  in  order  to  advance  upon  the  line  of 
battle. 

298.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second,  at  the 
commencement  of  the  movement,  and  the  lieutenant- 
colonels  of  the  other  battalions  as  indicated  No.  269, 
will  establish  two  markers  on  the  line  of  battle,  the 
right  marker  of  each  succeeding  battalion  at  twenty- 
two  paces  from  the  left  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

299.  After  changing  direction,  for  the  purpose  of 
marching  in  a  square  with  the  line,  the  right  guide 
of  the  first  division  of  each  of  the  battalions,  other 
than  the  first,  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  bring  the 
right  file  opposite  to  the  first  marker,  and  when  the 
head  of  the  battalion  is  at  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle  the  colonel  will  halt  it,  and  command  :  Right 
— Drkss.  At  this  command  each  battalion  will  be 
aligned  by  the  right,  in  the  manner  indicated  for  the 
first  battalion. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART   IV.        57 

300.  The  colonels  will  place  themselves  opposite 
the  centre  of  the  flanks  of  their  battalions  respec- 
tively, and  on  the  side  of  the  present  guides. 

301 .  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

302.  At  this,  the  markers  placed  before  the  masses 
will  retire. 

303.  If  the  general  should  wish  to  form  faced  to 
the  front  into  line  without  halting,  he  will  cause  the 
line  to  be  marked  in  advance,  and  the  movement  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  No.  292  and  following,  and  by  the  princi- 
ples indicated  in  the  S.  B.  Should  he  wish  to  con- 
tinue the  march  without  halting,  the  line  will  not  be 
marked  in  advance,  and  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in 
the  same  school. 

304.  If,  instead  of  deploying  the  column  ofi  the  first 
battalion,  the  general  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the 
iburth,  he  will  begin  by  causing  the  dispositions  pre- 
scribed No.  289  and  following  to  be  made,  and  then 
order  a  mounted  officer  to  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle  a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right 
battalion  will  arrive  ;  this  officer  will  establish  himself 
exactly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  placed  be- 
Ibre  the  head  of  the  column. 

305.  The  general  will  then  command  : 

1.  Bt/  battalion  in  niass,  on  the  fourth  battalion^  deploy 
columns.     2.  March  (or  double-quick— Mauch). 

306.  At  the  first  command  the  colonel  of  the 
fourth  battalion  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast.  The 
colonels  of  the  first  and  second  will  each  command  : 


oS        EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    BUIGADK — PART    IV. 

Baffnlimi,   right — FAC^:.     The   colonel  of  the  third 
Avill    command:    1.   Guide   left.     2.  Datlalion,    right 

ichecL  • 

307.  At  the  command  march ^  the  first  three  bat- 
talions ■will  put  themselves  in  movement ;  the  first 
division  of  the  first  battalion,  conducted  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, will  direct  itself  a  little  within  the 
line  of  battle  and  parnllelly  to  that  line ;  the  other 
battalions  will  execute  their  movements  in  conform- 
ity with  the  principles  prescribed  No.  296  and  fol- 
lowing. 

308.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth,  seeing  his  battalion 
nearly  unmasked,  will  command  :  1.  Column,  for- 
ward. 2.  Guide  left.  3.  March  (or  double-quick — 
March). 

309.  At  tlie  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
the  moment  the  battalion  is  unmaslced,  the  colonel 
will  conduct  it  toward  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at 
three  paces  from  that  line  he  will  halt  it  and  align  it 
by  the  left.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  then 
shift  to  the  right,  as  prescribed  No.  295. 

310.  When  the  left  file,  first  division,  first  battal- 
ion, is  abreast  with  the  marker,  which  has  been 
placed  by  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  command  :  1.  JUdtalion.  2.  Halt.  3. 
Front.  4.  Left  dress ;  and  the  battalion  will  be 
dressed  as  prescribed  No.  295. 

311.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command  : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

312.  Shouhl  the  general  Avish  to  continue  the 
march  without  halting,  the  line  will  not  be  marked 
in  advance,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  in 
conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
S.  B. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADt: — PART    IV.        59 

.  313.  According  to  llie  same  principles,  tlie  deploy- 
ment may  be  made  on  an  interior  battalion  of  the 
column.  The  general,  after  having  established  two 
markers  before  the  head  of  the  column,  will  order 
two  mounted  officers  to  place  themselves  respectively 
a  little  beyond  the  points  at  which  the  right  and  left 
battalions  will  arrive. 

314.  These  diflerent  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with  the 
left  in  front. 

315.  In  the  preceding  examples  the  line  of  battle 
has  been  established  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column  ;  the  general  may  also  establish  it  in  front  of 
any  interior  battalion,  and  then  deploy  the  column 
on  this  battalion,  or  on  any  other  that  he  may  judge 
proper. 

31(j.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  battle 
ought  to  be  established  in  front  of  the  third,  and 
that  it  is  intended  to  deploy  on  this  battalion  ;  the 
general  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  before 
the  first  division  of  the  designated  battalion,  and 
order  two  mounted  officers  to  place  themselves,  re- 
spectively, a  little  beyond  the  points  at  which  the 
right  and  left  battalions  will  arrive ;  he  will  then 
command : 

1.  Line  of  battle  on  the  third  hattaVwn. 

317.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  first  and 
second  battalions,  which  are  in  front  of  the  line  of 
battle,  will  face  by  the  rear  rank ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  general  will  add  : 

2.  By  battalion  in  mass,  on  the  third  baltalion,  deploy 
column.     3.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

318.  At  the  second  command,  the  colonel  of  the 


GO        EVOLUTIONS    or    A    IJRIGADK — PART    IV. 

third  will  caution  his  battalion  to  stand  fast.  The 
colonels  of  the  second  and  fourth  -will  each  command  : 
Battalion^  left — Fack.  The  colonel  of  the  first  will 
command:     1.  Gtdde  rif/h(.     2.  Battalion,  Ir/l  wheel. 

319.  At  the  command  march,  the  deployment  will 
commence;  the  colonel  of  the  thiril  will  aliun  liis  bat- 
talion by  the  left.  The  other  battalions  will  regulate 
themselves  in  conformity  with  the  principles  pre- 
scribed No.  295  and  following.  The  markers,  placed 
in  the  line  by  the  lieutenant-colonels  to  mark  the 
places  where  the  battalions  which  have  faced  by  the 
rear  rank  are  to  cross  the  line  of  battle,  will  be  a 
little  more  than  a  division  distance  apart,  in  order 
that  the  battalions  can  pass. 

320.  The  battalions  which  have  faced  by  the  rear 
rank  will  cross  the  line  of  battle  between  the  mark- 
ers, and  when  the  first  division  of  each  battalion  has 
passed  the  line  three  paces,  the  colonel,  who  will  have 
remained  in  front  of  that  line,  will  halt  the  battalion, 
and  face  it  by  the  front  rank ;  the  two  guides  of  the 
first  division,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left 
company,  will  place  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle, 
and  will  be  assured  in  their  positions  by  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel ;  which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  battalion  to  be  aligned  by  the  left. 

321.  The  movement  ended,  the  general  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Guides— Vos'\:s>. 

322.  If,  in  establishing  the  line  of  battle  on  the 
third,  the  general  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column  on 
any  other,  say  the  second  battalion^he  will  command  : 

1.  Line  of  haitle  on  the  third  battalion.  2.  Bj/  battal- 
ion in  ?»«.<:.«,  on  the  second  battalion,  deploy  column, 
3.  March  (or  double-quick — !RIakcii). 


KVOLUTIOXS    OF    A    BUIGADK — PART    IV.        61 

323.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  just  prescribed,  but  observing  what 
follows. 

324.  The  markers  whom  the  general  will  cause  to 
be  established  before  the  third  battalion  to  serve  as 
the  basis  of  alignment,  will  be  far  enough  apart  to 
permit  the  battalion  on  which  the  deployment  is 
made  to  pass  between  them. 

32.').  At  the  first  command  the  first  and  second 
battalions,  which  are  in  advance  of  the  line  of  battle, 
will  face  by  the  rear  rank. 

326.  At  the  second  command,  the  colonel  of  the 
second  will  caution  his  battalion  to  stand  fast.  The 
colonels  of  the  third  and  fourth  will  each  command  : 
Battalion.,  left — Face.  The  colonel  of  the  first  will 
command  :     1.   Guide  right.     2.  Battalion.!  left  loheel. 

327.  As  soon  as  the  second  battalion  is  unmasked, 
it  will  march;  cross  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the 
first  division  has  passed  three  paces  beyond,  the 
colonel  will  halt  the  battalion,  face  it  by  the  front 
rank,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

328.  When  the  third  battalion  has  gained,  in  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  the  twenty-two  paces  which  ought 
to  separate  it  from  the  second,  its  colonel  will  halt  it, 
face  it  to  the  front,  and  establish  it  on  the  line  of 
battle. 

329.  The  other  battalions  will  be  deployed  as  in 
the  preceding  examples. 

2d.  Faced  to  the  rear. 

330.  When  the  general  shall  wish  to  deploy  the 
column  faced  to  the  rear,  he  will  cause  it  to  execute 
the  countermarch,  and  then  deploy  it  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  for  deploying  faced  to 
the  front. 


62        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BlUGADK — rAllT    IV. 

3d.  Faced  to  the  left. 

331.  A  closed  column,  right  in  front,  having  to 
deploy  by  battalion  in  niat;s,  faced  to  the  left,  will 
execute  the  movement  in  the  following  manner: 

332.  Tlie  general  will  first  determine  the  line  of 
battle  on  the  right  Hank  of  the  column,  then  cause 
the  battery  to  leave  the  column,  and  the  interval  be- 
tween the  first  and  last  three  battalions  to  be  closed 
up.     He  will  then  command  : 

1.  Deploy  faced  to  the  left.     2.  By  hattalion  in  mass, 
change  direction  hy  the  right  flunk. 

333.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
command  :     Battalion,  right — Face. 

334.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

3.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

335.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  battalion  will 
execute  a  change  of  (lirection  as  indicated  in  the  >S^. 
B.,  No.  365  and  following,  except  that  the  chief  of 
the  first  division  of  each  battalion  will  place  himself 
on  the  right  of  his  division,  after  having  aligned  it. 

336.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command  : 

4.  Guides — Posts. 

337.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  deployed  by 
battalion  in  mass,  faced  to  the  right,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

4th.    Faced  to  the  rujht. 

338.  A  closed   column,  right  in  front,  having  to 


EVOLuri  ONS  OF  A   BRiCADE 


/•/.    7 

-' \ 


s^K^ 


^'J 


0 


!lli    »! 


331331 


I'lO      J. 


t/^  fi-rst  denMccjuoro,  2>y  h/siiikxZiaK  in.  ttulss  op^ 
the,  favjrik  laJ^oJjuxn,,  oLa-pSloy  colujntTu 


> 


iLliJItiii^' 

r^j  z. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    IJRIGADE — PART    IV.        63 

deploy  by  battalion  in  mass,  faced  to  the  rlixlit,  it  will 
change  direction  by  tlie  left  flank,  and  then  deploy 
by  the  means  and  commands  above  indicated  ;  but  as 
this  movement  is  much  longer  than  the  preceding 
one,  the  general  may,  when  circumstances  reciuirc  it, 
deploy  the  column  by  inversion,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  deploying  faced  to  the  left, 
observing  what  follows. 

339.  The  general  will  first  determine  the  line  of 
battle  on  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  order  out  the 
battery,  and  close  the  intervals,  as  prescribed  No. 
332,  and  will  then  command  : 

1.  Deploy  hi/  inversion  faced  to  the  right.  2.  By  bat- 
talion in  juass,  change  direction  by  the  left  flank. 
3.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

340.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  Xo.  .335. 

341.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  general  will 
add : 

4.  Guides — Posts. 

342.  The  battalions  being  thus  placed  by  inversion, 
the  masses  will  be  deployed  into  line  of  battle  in  the 
direct  order,  when  each  battalion  will  be,  in  respect 
to  the  others,  in  the  inverse,  while  it's  own  subdivis- 
ions are  in  the  direct  order. 

343.  A  closed  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  deploy- 
ed by  inversion  faced  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

bth.    Oblique  to  the  front  or  rear. 

344.  If  the  column  is  so  oblique  to  the  line  of  bat- 
tle as  to  require  any  considerable  Vnovement  of  the 
whole  column  in  order  to  establish  a  perpendicularity, 


64        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BKIGADE — PART    IV. 

the  firenoral  will  cause  the  line  to  be  marked  oblique 
to  the  column. 

345.  The  deplo)ments  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed No.  292  and  Ibllowing,  observing  what  follows. 

34(5.  The  battalions  next  to  the  one  of  I'orniation 
will  be  governed  in  their  movements  by  the  direction 
of  the  line  of  battle. 

REMARKS    OX   TIIH    MOVEMKNTS    OF    THE   BATTALIONS   OF   THE 
SECOND  LINK. 

347.  In  taking  wheeling  distance  preliminary  to 
forming  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  in 
wheeling  to  the  left  or  right  into  line,  and  in  all  the 
formations  from  column  into  line,  if  it  is  the  intention 
of  the  general  that  the  brigade  shall  be  formed  in  two 
lines,  he  will,  previously  to  the  commencement  of  the 
movement,  direct  the  colonels  of  the  battalions  con- 
stituting the  second  line  to  move  them  out  of  the 
column,  whence  they  will  be  marched  to  their  proper 
positions  in  rear  of  the  first  line,  under  the  direction 
of  their  chiefs. 

UEMAUKS  0\  THE  DISPOSITION  OF  THE  BRIGADE  BATTERY  IN 
FORMATIONS  FROM  COLUMN  INTO  LINE. 

348.  In  the  successive  formations  from  cofttmn  into 
line,  the  brigade  battery  will  generally  take  post  on 
the  flank  of  the  brigade,  and  nearest  the  point  d'apjnii 
of  the  formation. 

349.  It  will  endeavor  to  bring  an  oblique  fire  on  the 
enemy,  and  will,  if  possible,  silence  the  opposing  ar- 
tillery, before  commencing  fire  on  the  infantry  masses. 

Movements  which  may  be  executed  by  a  line  of  bat- 
talions in  masses. 

Ist.    The  advance  in  line. 

350.  The  line  being  deployed  by  battalion  in  mass, 


■/r /I     iS  f;  I  f,  A  D 


-.iiciT.  (-0   irat  T-.ttnc 
A "    :^6  8 


/'id  /     I 


^      I 


''!'''ri'i'iVi 


To  iulvocV'te  OT.  Ivne  of  hciMacluons  Tojtloy  h,rit,  ormo^isut 


iVi'i'iVi'l'i 


KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        65 

"when  the  general  shall  wish  it  to  advance  he  will 
designate  the  directing  battalion  (the  third  will  here 
be  supposed),  then  place  himself  in  front  of  this  bat- 
talion, verifying  the  direction  of  its  guides  in  respect 
to  their  perpendicularity  to  the  line  of  battle,  rectify 
the  direction,  if  necessary,  and  command: 

1.   The  third  the  battalion  of  direction. 

351.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  directing 
battalion  will  place  himself  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces 
in  front  of  the  guides,  face  to  them,  and  establish  him- 
self correctly  on  their  prolongation ;  the  general, 
placing  himself  in  rear  of  those  guides,  will  verify 
the  position  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  rectify  it,  if 
necessary,  and  then  command  : 

2.  Battalions^  forward. 

352.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
directing  battalion  will  conmiand  :  Guide  left,  and  the 
other  colonels,  Guide  left  (or  rir/ht),  according  as  they 
may  find  themselves  to  the  right  or  left  of  thQ  direct- 
ing battalion. 

353.  At  this  command,  the  right  general  guide  of 
the  directing  battalion  will  place  himself  six  paces 
in  front  of  his  left  guides  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
establish  him  on  the  perpendicular,  and  as  soon  as 
assured  in  that  position,  he  will  take  points  on  the 
ground  in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
;S.  B.,  No.  G51. 

354.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  of  the  battal- 
ion to  the  left  of  the  directing  one  will  pass  to  the 
left  of  his  division,  taking  post  in  the  front  rank,  and 
the  guide  of  that  flank  will  fall  back  to  the  rear  rank. 

355.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  every  subordinate 
battalion  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of  its  headmost 
division  the  direction  he  ought  to  follow,  and  this 
guide  will  immediately  take  his  points  on  the  ground. 


li<j         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    15RUJADK — rAHT    IV. 

o~)('}.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
Avill  add  : 

March  (or  douhJe-quick — ^Marcii). 

357.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  put 
itself  in  movement;  the  general  guide  of  the  direct- 
ing battalion  will  carefully  conform  himself  to  what 
is  prescribed  for  the  color-bearer  in  the  -S".  Z?.,  No. 
659;  the  guide  of  its  headmost  division  will  mandi 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  general  guide,  preserving 
the  original  distance  of  six  paces  from  him,  but  with- 
out constraining  himself,  in  this,  to  minute  exactness; 
the  guides  of  the  other  battalions  will  direct  them- 
selves perpendicularly  to  the  front. 

.-558.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion 
being,  pending  the  march,  ])laced  by  the  side  of  the 
guide  of  his  first  division,  will  take  care  to  maintain 
between  his  battalion  and  that  next  to  its  right  or 
left,  on  the  side  of  the  direction,  the  interval  of 
twenty-two  paces. 

359.  The  chief  of  each  first  division  will  maintain 
himself  exactly  abreast  with  its  guide  on  the  opposite 
fiank,  and  will  supei'intend  tlie  march  of  the  division, 
according  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  i>.,  No.  667 
and  following. 

360.  The  other  divisions  will  conform  themselves 
to  the  rules  for  the  marcdi  in  column. 

361.  The  colonels  will  hold  themselves  on  the 
flanks  of  their  respective  battalions,  each  on  the  side 
of  direction,  and  superintend  the  movement. 

2d.    To  huh  the  Hue,  viarchiiig  in  advance,  and  to  alitjn  it. 

362.  The  line  being  in  march,  when  the  general 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalions.      2.  Halt. 


EVOLUTIONS    OV    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.         67 

363.  The  line  being  halted,  if  the  general  wish  to 
oive  a  general  alignment,  he  will  place  two  markers 
before  the  directing  battalion,  and  then  command  : 

1.   Guides  on  the  line. 

364.  At  this,  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  sub- 
ordinate battalion  will  place  two  markers  before  its 
head  on  the  alignment  of  those  established  by  the 
general ;  and  the  chief  of  each  first  division  will  pass 
to  the  ilank  of  his  division  on  the  side  of  the  direc- 
tion. 

365.  As  soon  as  the  markers  arc  correctly  estab- 
lished en  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonels,  without  re- 
gulating themselves  on  each  other,  will  align  their 
battalions  by  the  flank  of  direction  in  the  manner 
prescribed  No.  295. 

366.  The  battalions  being  aligned,  the  general 
will  command  : 

2.  Guides — Posts. 

ocl.    The  Hue  marching  in  adcance,  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction, 

36  7.  The  line  being  in  march,  it  is  supposed  that 
the  general  wishes  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to 
the  right ;  he  will  go  to  the  point  at  which  he  may 
wish  tbe  right  of  the  new  line  to  rest,  and  place  two 
markers,  one  at  the  point  d'appui,  the  other  at  divis- 
ion distance  from  the  first. 

868.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  command  ; 

1.   Change  direction  to  the  right. 

369.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 


68        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BUIGADE — PART    IV. 

first  battalion  will  command  :  1.  Guile  Irft  :  2.  Bat- 
talion, 7-if/lif  iclied  :  at  this  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  place  himself  belore  the  centre  of 
his  division. 

370.  The  other  colonels  will  each  command  :  (InUle 
rifjht  :  at  this  command,  the  chief  of  eacli  first  divis- 
ion will  place  himself  before  its  centre. 

371.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  (or  douhle-quick — Maucii). 

372.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the 
first  battalion  will  change  direction  by  wheeling,  ac- 
cording to  the  principle  i)rescribed  in  the  S.  7i.,  No. 
348  and  following;  its  colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel 
until  its  front  is  parallel  to  the  line  of  battle ;  he  will 
then  conduct  it  forward,  halt  it  three  paces  from  this 
line,  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

373.  The  other  battalions  will  be  marched  toward 
the  line  of  battle,  each  executing  in  succession  slight 
changes  of  direction  to  the  right,  so  that,  on  arriving 
at  twenty  paces  from  that  line,  the  headmost  division 
may  be  parallel  to  it  ;  to  this  end,  the  leading  guide, 
advancing  insensibly  the  left  shoulder,  will  direct 
himself  circularly  to  the  right;  the  other  guides  Avill 
follow  his  movement  in  marching  exactly  in  his  trace, 
and  the  divisions  will  each  conform  itself  to  the 
movement  of  its  guide  as  prescribed  No.  154. 

374.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  immediately  es- 
tablish a  marker  at  twenty-two  paces  from  the  left 
flank  of  the  first  battalion,  and  another  at  division 
distance  from  the  first,  and  at  the  instant  of  detach- 
ing himself  he  will  be  replaced  at  the  head  of  the 
column  by  its  senior  major, 

375.  The  lieutenant-colonels  of  the  other  battal- 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    IV.        69 

ions  win  successively  conform  themselves  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the 
second ;  each  will  precede  his  battalion  on  the  line 
of  battle  by  about  lifty-five  paces. 

376.  The  movement  ended,  the  general  will  add  : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

377.  Chanires  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 


378.  It  is  essential  that  the  battalion  on  which  the 
movement  is  made  should  arrive  perpendicularly  to 
the  line  of  battle;  to  this  end,  and  conformably  to 
the  principle  established  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  352,  the 
colonel  of  this  battalion  will  cause  the  step  of  the 
pivot  to  be  j^hortened,  if  this  should  become  neces- 
sary ;  and  if,  notwitlistanding  this  piecaution,  some 
of  the  divisions  be  not  able  to  conform  themselves 
exactly  to  the  movement  of  the  first,  they  will,  on 
halting  the  battalion,  be  promptly  conducted  by  the 
flank  into  the  true  direction  before  the  battalion  is 
aligned. 

4th.    To  march  the  line  in  retreat. 

379.  The  line  being  at  halt,  when  the  general 
shall  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat  he  will  command  : 

Face  by  the  rear  rank. 

380.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  battalions  will 
face  in  the  manner  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  Xo.  1 ,223 
and  following;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  (or  last)  divis- 
ion of  each  battalion  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 


10         KVOI.UTIONS    Ol'     A    lUtKiADK  —  I'AKT    IV. 

his  division  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front 
rank,  and  the  cdiief  of  cacdi  first  division  will  place 
himself  be-fore  its  centre. 

381.  These  dispositions  being  executed,  the  gener- 
al will  designate  the  directing  battalion,  and  cause 
the  direction  to  be  traced  as  under  the  first  head,  to 
advance  in  line,  No.  350,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Battalions,  forward. 

382.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
directing  battalion  will  command  :  Guide  right,  and 
the  other  colonels,  Guide  left  (or  right),  according  as 
they  may  find  themselves  to  the  lelt  or  right  of  the 
directing  battalion. 

383.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.  March  {ov  douUe-quick — March). 

384.  The  line  will  march  in  retreat  according  to 
the  principles  presciibed  for  marching  in  advance. 

385.  The  line  in  march  can  be  marched  in  retreat 
without  halting  by  the  commands  and  means  indicat- 
ed No.  380  and  following,  observing  what  follows. 
The  command,  Right  about,  will  be  substituted  for 
the  command,  Face  by  the  rear  rani;  and  the  com- 
mand, Battalions,  forward,  will  be  omitted. 

38G.  The  general  having  halted  the  line,  and 
wishing  to  face  it  by  the  front  rank,  will  command  : 

Face  hij  the  front  rank. 

387.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  battalion 
will  face  by  the  front  rank ;  which  being  executed, 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  retake   his  place  in 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BUIGADK — PAKT    IV.         71 

5th.    To  chani/c  direction  of  I  lie  line  marchimj   in  retreat. 

388.  The  line  marcliing  in  retreat  will  change  di- 
rection by  the  same  means  and  commands  as  if  it  wore 
advancing,  observing  what  follows: 

38!).  It  is  supposed  that  the  general  wishes  to 
change  direction  to  the  left ;  he  will  place  two  mark- 
ers on  the  new  direction,  the  first  at  the  point 
(Vappui^  and  the  second  at  such  distance  from  the 
first  that  the  battalion  may  easily  pass  between 
them. 

390.  The  first  battalion  will  be  conducted  to  and 
established  on  the  new  direction,  as  indicated  Nos. 
368  and  372  ;  but  it  will  cross  the  line  of  battle ;  and 
when  the  first  division  has  passed  three  paces  beyond, 
the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  and  face  it  by  the 
front  rank. 

301.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  faces,  the  guides  of 
the  first  division  will  place  themselves  on  the  line  of 
battle,  and  be  assured  in  their  positions  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel ;  which  being  done,  the  colonel  will 
align  the  battalion  by  the  right. 

392.  The  otlier  colonels  will  each  direct  his  bat- 
talion so  that  it  may  arrive,  when  at  twenty  paces, 
parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle;  he  will  then  cause  it 
to  pass  that  line,  betAveen  the  two  markers  placed  in 
advance  by  the  lieutenant-colonel  in  the  manner  in- 
dicated No.  389.  When  the  first  division  has  passed 
three  paces  beyond  tlie  lino,  the  battalion  will  be 
halted,  faced  by  the  front  rank,  and  aligned  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  first. 

393.  A  line  of  battalion  masses,  left  in  front,  will 
march  and  change  direction,  advancing  and  re- 
treating, according  to  the  same  principles  and 
inverse  means ;  the  fourth  or  last  division  of  each 
mass  will  conform  itselt  to  what  is  prescribed  ibr  the 
first,  and  reciprocally. 


72        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BUIGADK — PART    IV. 

&th.    To    break    the   line  formed   hy  battalion   in  maaa,  into 
column. 

394.  The  line  beln/r  at  a  halt,  when  the  general 
shall  Avish  to  break  it  to  the  right  into  column  by 
battalion,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Bi/  batlalion,  right  in  front,  into  column. 

395.  This  having  bcch  repeated,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  each  battalion  Avill  place  a  marker  before 
the  left  guide  of  its  first  division,  and  a  second  at 
division  distance  from  the  first,  in  a  direction  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  of  battle. 

39G.  At  the  same  time,  each  colonel  will  com- 
mand:  1.  Change,  direction  hy  the  left  flank  :  2.  Bat- 
talion, left — Face. 

397.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

398.  At  this,  each  battalion  will  change  direction 
by  the  means  indicated  in  the  6'.  B. 

7th.    To  ploi/  the  line  of  masses  into  culnmn. 

399.  When  a  line  of  battalions  in  mass  has  to  be 
ployed  into  column,  as  the  battalions,  by  reason  of 
their  depth  and  the  smallness  of  the  intervals  be- 
tween them,  can  not  be  directed  diagonally  toward 
the  points  at  which  they  ought  respectively  to  enter 
the  column,  the  movement  will  be  executed  in  the 
following  manner: 

400.  It  will  be  supposed  that  tlie  line  ought  to  be 
ployed  on  the  third  battalion,  right  in  front ;  the 
general  will  place  himself  in  front  of  this  battalion, 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    IlIUGADK — PART    IV.         73 

and  aftt-r  assuring  liiniself  that  tbe  guides  are  cor- 
rectly placed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  battalion  in  7nass,  on  the  third  battalion,  right  in 
front,  into  column.  2.  March  (or  double-quick — 
March). 

401.  At  the  first  command,  each  colonel  who  finds 
himself  to  the  right  of  the  directing  battalion  will 
command:  1.   Column,  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 

402.  The  colonel  to  the  left  of  the  directing  battal- 
ion will  give  the  same  commands,  afler  causing  his 
battalion  to  face  about. 

403.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence  ;  the  first  and  second  battalions  will  march 
to  the  front,  and  when  the  last  division  of  the  second 
battalion  shall  have  passed  division  distance  beyond 
the  first  division  of  the  third,  the  colonel  will  cause 
his  battailion  to  face  to  the  left,  in  marching,  in  order 
to  take  its  place  in  column  ;  Avhen  the  left  guides, 
arrive  on  the  direction  of  those  of  the  third,  the 
colonel  of  the  second  will  halt  it,  and  cause  it  to  face 
to  the  front. 

404.  At  the  moment  of  halting,  the  left  guides, 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  themselves  on  the  pro- 
longation of  those  of  the  third  battalion  ;  and  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  their  rear,  will  assure 
them  on  the  direction  ;  which  being  done,  the  colonel 
will  cause  his  battalion  to  be  aligned  by  the  left,  and 
then  order  the  guides  fo  face  about. 

405.  The  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  conform 
himself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
colonel  of  the  second,  as  his  last  division  has  passed 
division  distance  beyond  the  front  rank,  first  division, 
of  the  battalion  which  entered  the  column  next  be- 
fore his  own. 

40G.  The  fourth  battalion  will  enter  the  column  in 
C 


74         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BKIGADE — PART    IV. 

like  manner;  the  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  cause  it 
to  fac(;  to  the  left  in  marching,  when  its  first  division 
has  passed  division  distance  beyond  the  rear  rank, 
last  division,  of  the  third  battalion,  and  he  will  halt 
his  battalion  when  its  left  guides  are  on  the  direction 
of  those  of  the  third. 

407.  At  the  moment  of  halting,  the  guides  of  the 
fourth  Avill  promptly  place  themselves  on  the  pro- 
longation of  those  of  the  third  battalion,  and  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  them  on  that  direction  ; 
which  being  done,  the  colonel  will  cause  his  battalion 
to  be  aligned  by  the  left. 

408.  A  line  of  masses  will  be  ployed  into  column, 
left  in  front,  according  to  the  same  princi[)les  and  by 
inverse  means. 

409.  If  the  line  of  battalions  in  mass  are  in  march, 
the  column  can  be  formed  either  in  rear  of  the  first 
or  last  battalion  of  the  line,  without  halting,  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  No.  391)  and  follow- 
ing, and  by  the  principles  indicated  No.  199  and 
following,  S.  B.^  observing  what  follows.  The  bat- 
talions to  the  right  or  left  of  the  one  of  formation 
will  lace  by  the  k;ft  or  right  fiank,  instead  of  facing 
about,  and  each  will  take  its  place  in  column  as  soon 
as  able  to  pass. 

KKMAUKS  ox  FOnJriNO   A  COLUMN  CI.OSRD    IN    MASS,    FROM  A 
MM-:  OK  BATTALIONS  IN  MASS. 

410.  If  it  is  found  expedient  to  give  a  greater  con- 
centration to  the  troops,  the  general  may  Ibrm  the 
whole  column  closed  in  mass,  with  a  distance  of  but 
six  paces  between  the  division  guides. 

8^//.    To  take  deplmjiiuj  intcrcah  from  a  line  formed  by  bat- 
talions ill  maas. 

411.  The  line  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  general 


Evo c(jr/OA/s  or  A  b^^ga  0£: 


B y  haJttaJ^BV^ -LTi  mAiUi ,071  Fvrat  ^  V--^ 

bcLttoUUuit,  laJk*.  dtJiiojcnM  t,rCterya.lt 


/ 

«1M 

nrrrm 

4^ 

1 

'^'^     -  ^  ^^  ^  ^B  Jf"  4  ZO 

^  ^S  ^  ^^      ^ 

rVrrrTrfi 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRKJADE — PART    IV.         «  '» 

shall  wish  to  take  deploying  intervals  by  battalion  in 
mass,  on  any  battalion,  say  the  third,  he  will  eausc 
two  markers  lo  be  placed  in  front  of  that  battalion, 
a  little  less  than  division  distance  apart,  and  three 
paces  in  front  of  the  line  ;  hO  will  then  cause  the  line 
to  be  prolonjred,  to  the  right  and  left,  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  291. 

412.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  command : 

1.  Bij  battalion  in  mass,  on  the  third  battalion,  take 
deploying  intervals.  2.  March  (or  double-quick — 
March). 

413.  At  the  first  command  the  colonel  of  the  third 
will  caution  his  battalion  to  stand  fast;  the  colonels 
of  the  first  two  battalions  will  command  :  1.  Right 
face  ;  2.  Battalion,  forward,  guide  left.  The  colonel 
of  the  fourth  will  command:  1.  Left  face;  2.  Bat- 
talion, forward,  guide  right. 

414.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the 
colonel  of  the  third  Avill  establish  his  battalion  on  the 
markers  in  front,  dressing  it  to  the  left,  in  the  manner 
prescribed  No.  295  ;  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  bat- 
talions will  put  themselves  in  march  by  the  flanks,  and 

'  when  each  of  the  battalions  on  the  right  of  the  direct- 
ing one  separates  itself  from  the  battalion  on  its  left, 
a  distance  equal  to  twenty-two  paces  and  the  front  of 
three  divisions,  its  colonel  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the 
front,  and  dress  it  to  the  left  upon  the  markers  which 
have  been  established  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

415.  The  colonel  of  the  fourth,  when  he  has  sepa- 
rated his  battalion  a  like  distance  from  the  third,  will 
halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  dress  it  to  the  right 
upon  the  markers,  as  indicated  above. 

410.  The  lieutenant-colonels  of  the  battalions,  other 
than  the  third,  will  each  establish  for  his  battalion  two 


7G         EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    DlilGADr: — I'A  K  T    IV. 

markers  on  the  line  of  battle,  in  the  manner  indicated 
No.  2u9. 

417.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

418.  If,  however,  it  should  be  the  wish  of  the  gen- 
eral to  establish  the  battalions  in  mass,  at  deploying 
intervals,  on  a  line  of  battle  in  front  of  the  present 
one,  either  parallel  or  ohllque  to  it,  he  will  establish 
two  markers  to  indicate  where  the  battalion  of  direc- 
tion, say  the  third,  shall  rest,  and  cause  the  line  of 
battle  to  be  marked,  as  prescribed  Xo.  291. 

420.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  then  command : 

1.  Bi/  hatfalion  in  )na!<s,  forioard,  on  the  tJiird  baltalioriy 
take  deploijing  interoals.  2.  March  (or  double- 
quick — March). 

421.  At  the  first  command,  the  colonels  of  the  dif- 
ferent battalions,  seeing  the  position  of  the  markers 
of  the  directing  battalion,  will  give  such  cautionary 
commands  as  shall  be  necessary  in  order  to  direct 
their  battalions  toward  their  positions  on  the  new  line 
of  battle. 

422.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the 
battalions  will  be  put  in  march,  and,  conducted  by 
their  colonels,  will  be  established  in  their  proper 
posts  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

423.  The  lieutenant-colonels,  as  ])rescribed  No. 
2G9,  will  each  precede  his  battalion  upon  the  new 
line  of  battle,  and  establish  markers  to  indicate  where 
the  head  of  his  battalion  shall  rest. 

424.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command  : 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    DRIGADK — PART    lY.        7  7 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

REMARKS  ON  THK  ItlSPOSITIONS  OF  TOK  COMPANIES  Ot"  SKIU- 
MISIIKRS  IN  A  LINE  OK  BATTALIONS  IN  MASS. 

0-425.  Whenever  the  battalions  are  formed  by  mass 
into  line  of  battle,  with  an  interval  of  twenty-two 
paces  between  them,  the  platoon  columns  of  skir- 
mishers of  caclr  battalion  will  take  a  position  closed 
in  mass  in  rear  of  its  last  division;  the  first  platoon 
column  in  rear  of  the  outer  platoon  of  the  right 
company,  and  the  second  platoon  column  in  rear  of 
the  outer  platoon  of  the  left  company.  In  marching 
in  advance,  or  retreat,  or  in  changing  direction,  they 
will  retain  this  position.  On  the  formation  of  column, 
or  when  deploying  intervals  are  taken,  the  skirmish- 
ers Avill  resume  their  proper  places,  as  prescribed  in 
the  S.  B. 

REMARKS    ON    INVERSIONS. 

426.  The  principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No. 
642  and  following,  for  breaking  or  ploi/ing  into  column 
a  single  battalion,  formed  in  line  of  battle  by  inver- 
sion, are  applicable  to  a  brigade  when  formed  in  line 
by  inversion,  in  the  manner  indicated  No.  22G  and 
following;  but  when  the  battalions  are  placed,  in 
respect  to  each  other,  in  the  inverse  order,  whilst 
their  subdivisions  are  in  the  direct  order,  as  indicated 
No.  342,  other  means,  to  be  immediately  prescribed, 
will  be  employed  for  breaking  or  ploying  the  line 
into  column,  if  it  be  desired  to  replace  the  battalions 
in  the  direct  order.  The  principles  prescribed  in  the 
»S^.  jB.,  Nos.  631)-G41  are  also  applicable  to  a  brigade. 

427.  It  will  be  suppose<l  that  the  general,  in  caus- 
ing the  line  to  break,  wishes  to  march  it  to  the  left, 
he  will  order  each  colonel  to  cause  his  battalion  to 
break  to  the  ri^ht  in  order  to  march  toward  the  left 


78        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    llRIGADi: — PAUT    IV. 

(in  column  at  full  distance)  as  if  it  were  isolated; 
and  as  soon  as  the  battalions  break  he  will  put  them 
in  march  all  at  the  same  time.  In  this  way  the  column 
-will  find  itself  united  and  formed  in  the  direct  order 
as  soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  ea(  h  battalion  has 
turned  into  the  new  direction. 

428.  li",  instead  of  breakiufr  the  line  (into  column 
at  full  distance),  the  rreneral  shall  wish  to  ploy  it  into 
column,  say  on  tiie  third  battalion,  ^o  that  the  first 
battalion  may  be  in  front,  he  will  order  the  colonel 
of  the  third  to  ploy  it  into  column,  right  in  front,  on 
its  second  division ;  at  the  same  time  he  will  order 
the  other  colonels  to  ploy  their  respective  battalions, 
right  in  front,  on  the  division  nearest  to  the  directing 
battalion,  and  then  cause  the  masses  to  enter  the 
column  as  follows  :  the  first  and  second  battalions  in 
front,  and  the  fourth  in  rear  of  the  directing  battal- 
ion. 

429.  If,  in  breaking  the  line,  it  be  desired  to  march 
toward  the  right,  or  if,  in  ploying  it,  it  be  desired  to 
place  the  fourth  battalion  in  front,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  bv  inverse  means. 


Vtl.  $ 


jyaurr/oj/s  of  A_ojR^ij!i^DE 


^      ,,     4..,.......fi A. 


Tc  <x.fl^v4C7w:e  irv  li^»  of  baZllo 


I'l'ni'i'n'i 


EVOLUTIOJS    OK    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.  79 

PART  FIFTH. 

Articlp:  I. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle  deployed. 

430.  The  general,  wishing  to  cause  the  line  to  a'l- 
vAnce  in  this  order,  will  choose  as  the  directing  bat- 
talion, say  the  third,  the  one  which  he  may  deem 
most  favorably  placed  for  the  purpose ;  he  will  ap- 
proach this  battalion  and  command  : 

1.   The  third  the  battalion  of  direction. 

431.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  and 
lieutenant-colonel  of  every  battalion  will  place  them- 
selves in  rear  and  in  front  of  the  color-file  of  thair 
respet^tive  battalions,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.y 
Nos.  648,  649. 

432.  The  colonel  of  the  directing  battalion,  having 
assured  his  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  perpendicular, 
will  promptly  establish  two  markers  behind  his  bat- 
talion, as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  650. 

433.  The  general  will  verify  the  direction  of  these 
markers,  rectify  it,  if  necessary,  and  charge  an  officer 
to  superintend,  pending  the  march,  the  successive 
replacing  of  them. 

434.  The  general  will  then  command  : 

2.  Battalions,  forward. 

435.  This  command  having  been  repeated,  the 
color-rank  of  every  battalion  will  advance  six  paces, 
and  its  two  general  guides  will  place  themselves  out 
abreast  with  this  rank ;  the  senior  major  will  place 
himself  at  six  or  eight  paces  from  the  ll.:ink  of  the 


80         KVOLUTION8    OF    A    IllUGADK— I'AKT    V. 

color-rank,  and  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  directing 
battalion. 

43G.  The  {renernl  need  not  0(enj)v  himself  with 
the  jieneral  ali;iinnent  of  the  color-ranks  and  Lieneral 
gnidcs  of  the  dilleicMit  baltalions;  it  will  siiflice  if 
those  of  each  battalion  conform  themselves  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed. 

437.  These  dispositions  liaving  been  made,  the 
general  will  add  : 

3 .  M  A  R  c  H  (or  (Zo  t/  hle-q  u  ick — INI  arch). 

438.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapidity, 
the  line  will  step  oil"  with  life;  each  battalion  will 
observe  with  the  utmost  care  the  ])rincli)les  prescrib- 
ed in  the  .S'.  B.  for  marching  in  line  of  hattle. 

439.  Each  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  con- 
form himself,  for  the  maintenance  of  the  <lirection 
and  alignment,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
S.  B. 

440.  The  directing  battalion  being  regarded  as  in- 
fallible by  all  the  others,  and  having  thus  the  great- 
est intluence  on  them,  its  march  will  be  superintended 
with  the  utmost  care;  conse(]Ucntly,  the  general,  or 
the  ollicer  deputed  by  him,  j)laced  in  front  of  this 
battalion,  will  labor  to  maintain  its  centre  steadily 
on  the  perpendicular;  to  this  end,  he  will  frccjuently 
place  himself  fiom  thirty  to  forty  ])aces  in  front  of 
the  color-bearer,  face  to  the  rear,  and  alip[n  himself 
correctly  on  the  markers  establi^hed  behind  the  bat- 
talion ;  lie  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of 
the  centre  corporal,  as  well  as  that  of  the  color- 
bearer. 

441.  If  the  lino  of  direction  of  this  battalion  be 
badly  chosen,  and  this  may  often  ha[)pen,  as  it  is 
very  diflicult  to  detcrnn'ne  the  perj)endicular  with 
precision,  the  general  and  the  colonel  of  this  battal- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.         81 

ion  will  perceive  it  at  the  end  of  a  few  paces  by  the 
crowdin«ijs  in  one  wing,  and  the  openings  of  files  in 
the  other. 

442.  If,  for  example,  the  line  of  direction,  instead 
of  being  perpendicular  to  the  primitive  line  of  battle, 
be  taken  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicular,  the  di- 
recting battalion  will  soon  be  in  an  oblique  position 
to  both  of  those  lines;  the  interval  to  its  right  will 
be  more  and  more  diminished,  and  that  to  the  left 
increased  in  the  same  proportion,  which  will  force  all 
the  subordinate  battalions  to  oblique  to  the  right  to 
regain  their  intervals ;  the  general,  by  placing  him- 
self on  either  flank  of  the  directing  battalion,  will 
perceive  that  the  battalions  to  its  right  are  in  ad- 
vance, and  those  to  its  left  in  the  rear,  in  respect  to 
the  false  direction  of  that  battalion. 

443.  Promptly  to  remedy  this  fault,  the  general 
will  order  the  senior  major  of  the  directing  battalion 
to  place  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  before  its  centre, 
and  to  face  to  the  rear ;  he  will  himself  go  at  the 
same  time  to  a  like  distance  behind  its  rear,  and 
place,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  the  senior  major  on  the 
direction  he  may  choose  to  give ;  the  colonel  of  this 
battalion  will  immediately  caution  the  centre  corpo- 
ral and  the  color-bearer  to  conform  tjiemselves  to 
this  new  direction,  and  the  officer  superintending  the 
markers  in  the  rear  will  immediately  establish  them 
on  that  direction. 

444.  If,  at  the  end  of  a  few  paces,  the  general  per- 
ceive that  the  new  direction  is  not  exact,  he  will 
promptly  give  another ;  but  with  a  good  coup  d'csilj 
and  the  habit  of  directing  lines,  he  will  rarely  find-it 
necessary  to  change  the  direction  more  than  once. 

445.  Each  subordinate  battalion  will  maintain  iti 
interval  on  the  side  of  the  directing  battalion. 

446.  The  preservation  of  intervals  between  battal- 
ions being  the  most  essential  point  in  the  march  in 

7 


82         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BIUGADK — TAUT    V. 

line,  the  colonels  will  give  to  it  the  utmost  atten- 
tion. 

447.  A  battalion  can  only  lose  its  interval  from 
another  by  the  fal^e  dii-ection  pursued  by  its  color- 
bearer,  Tiie  colonel  may  early  perceive  this  by  the 
indications  noticed  Xos.  441-2,  and  as  a  remedy  he 
will  apply  the  means  indicated  in  the  »S.  7i.,  No.  670 
and  follow in<i. 

448.  The  interval  maybe  momentarily  diminished 
by  openings  between  files;  in  this  case,  it  will  suflice 
to  cause  the  files  to  close  insensibly  upon  the  centre 
of  their  battalion. 

449.  The  general  being  further  in  rear  of  the  line 
than  the  colonels,  may  see  at  once  several  battalions ; 
hence  itAvill  be  easy  lor  him  to  perceive  whence  the 
loss  of  intervals,  and  he  will  give  'prompt  notice 
thereof  to  the  colonels. 

450.  When  the  loss  of  interval  is  but  slight,  and 
the  battalion  does  not  slant  in  respect  to  the  perpen- 
dicular, the  colonel  may  confine  himself  to  cautioning 
the  color-bearer  to  incline  insensibly  to  the  right  or 
left,  without  taking  the  oblicjue  step ;  by  this  means 
the  interval  may  be  re-establislicd  without  inconven- 
ience. As  to  the  general  alignment,  the  following 
rules  will  be  observed  : 

451.  A  scrupulous  attention  need  not  be  given  to 
the  maintenance  of  the  colors  and  general  guides  of 
the  several  battalions  exactly  abreast  with  each  other; 
consequently,  the  senior  major  of  each  battalion, 
placed  on  the  flank  of  his  color-rank  on  the  side  op- 
posite to  the  direction,  will  not  cause  the  color-bearer 
to  shorten  or  lengthen  the  step,  but  when  this  may  be 
evidently  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  a  certain 
degree  of  general  harmony. 

452.  The  two  general  guides  of  each  battalion  will 
conform  themselves  steadily  to  the  direction  of  the 
color-rajik  of  the  same  battalion,  and  hold  themselves 


EVOLUTION'S    OF    A.  BRIGADE — PART    V.  83 

abreast  with  this  rank  without  deference  to  the  colors 
and  jzcneral  iiuides  of  the  other  battalions. 

453.  Notliing  contributes  more  to  fatigue  soldiers, 
and  to  derange  tbe  interior  order  of  battalions,  than 
frequent  variations  of  stej) ;  the  three  corporals  placed 
in  the  centre  of  each  battalion  will  observe  steadily 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  pace,  without  endeav- 
oring to  maintain  themselves  exactly  at  the  distance 
of  six  paces  from  the  color-rank;  consequently,  they 
will  not  vary  in  either  of  those  particulai's  except  on 
a  caution,  to  that  effect,  from  their  colonel  or  lieuten- 
ant-colonel. 

454.  To  carry  through  the  same  principle,  colonels 
will  not  scrupulously  endeavor  to  maintain  their  bat- 
talions abreast  with  each  other;  consequently,  they 
will  not  cause  the  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened, 
the  time  to  be  marked  or  quickened,  except  when  one 
or  the  other  shall  evidently  be  necessary  in  order  to 
preserve  a  certain  degree  of  harmony  in  the  line:  if 
it  happen  that  a  battalion  find  itself  a  pace  or  two  in 
advan(;e  or  in  rear  of  the  neighboring  battalions,  this 
slight  irregularity  may  soon  correct  itself  without 
particular  orders  or  interference. 

455.  Colonels  will  carefully  look  to  the  direction 
and  interior  order  of  their  respective  battalions,  and 
the  lieutenant-colonels  to  the  alignment. 

456.  The  general  will  occupy  himself  more  particu- 
larly with  the  directing  battalion,  but  his  nttention 
will  at  the  same  time  be  given  to  the  whole  line. 

GENCRAL  REMARKS  OX  THE  MARCH  IX  LINE  OF  BATTLE. 

457.  The  march  in  line  of  battle  can  not  be  effected 
with  the  necessary  order  and  harmony  of  parts,  if 
the  several  battalions  have  not  been  previously  and 
individually  exercised  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples or  in  the  S.  B. 


84  KV0LUT10N8    OF    A    BKIGADE  —  PART    V. 

458.  Although  unitbrmity  of  step  be  the  first  cle- 
ment in  the  march  in  line  of  battlo,  the  movement 
■will  be  imperfect  if  the  color-bearer  be  not  accustom- 
ed to  prolong,  Avithout  variation,  a  given  direction, 
and  if  the  colonels  have  not  the  habit  of  conducting 
their  battalions  with  address  and  intelligence. 

459.  It  is  by  the  uniformity  of  step  that  the  differ- 
ent battalions  can  alone  maintain  themselves,  without 
effort,  abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  each  other,  pending 
the  march. 

460.  By  exercising  frequently,  in  advance,  the 
sergeants  as  color-bearers,  in  prolonging  a  given 
direction,  colonels  may  best  prevent  the  loss  of  inter- 
vals in  marching  in  line. 

461.  Finally,  it  is  in  forming  the  coup  rVail,  by  a 
persevering  exercise,  that  generals  and  colonels  can 
alone  acquire  accuracy  and  iacility  in  judging  the 
line  of  direction,  and  of  conducting  battalions  on 
every  sort  of  ground  with  the  address  and  intelli- 
gence necessary  to  prevent  faults,  or  promptly  to  cor- 
rect them. 

462.  The  general  may  choose,  as  the  directing 
battalion,  either  in  the  line  that  he  may  judge  the 
best  posted  for  the  particular  march,  yet,  other  con- 
sideiations  being  equal,  he  ought  to  give  the  prefer- 
ence to  a  central  battalion. 

Article  II. 

To  halt  the  line,  and  to  align  it. 

403.  The  line  being  in  march,  and  the  general 
wishing  to  halt  it,  he  will  co;iimand  : 

* 
1.  Battalions. 

464.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
add  : 


evolutions  of  a  bkigadk — part  v.      85 

2.  Halt. 

465.  This  havinji  been  repeated  with  the  utmost 
rapidity,  the  line  will  halt.  The  color-rank  and  gen- 
eral guides  of  each  battalion  will  halt,  but  remain  in 
front  of  the  line. 

466.  The  line  being  halted,  and  the  general  Avish- 
ing  to  give  it  a  general  alignment,  he  will  place 
himself  some  paces  on  the  right  of  the  directing  color, 
in  order  the  better  to  see  the  whole  line,  and  thence 
to  determine  the  new  direction. 

467.  He  will  next  order  the  color-bearer  and  the 
left  general  guide  of  this  battalion  to  face  to  him, 
when  he  will  place  them  on  the  direction  he  shall  have 
chosen  ;  the  right  general  guide  will  face  to  the  left, 
and  align  himself  on  the  color-bearer  and  the  left 
general  guide  of  the  same  battalion ;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  assure  him  on  this  direction,  and  the  two 
corporals  of  the  color-rank  will  fall  back  into  their 
places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

468.  The  basis  of  alignment  being  thus  assured, 
the  general  will  command : 

1.   Colors  and  general  guides^  on  the  line. 

469.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  color-bearers 
and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions  will  face 
to  the  color  of  the  directing  battalion  ;  those  of  the 
next  battalion  to  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  will 
align  themselves  correctly  on  the  color  and  general 
guides  of  that  battalion;  those  of  the  other  battalion 
will  align  themselves  on  the  colors  ;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  and  senior  major  of  each  battalion  will 
promptly  assure  the  color-bearer  and  general  guides 
of  their  battalions  on  the  new  direction ;  all  the 
bearers  will  carry  their  colors  perpendicularly  be- 
tween their  eyes,  and  the  corporals  of  their  rank  will 
fall  back  into  their  places  in  line. 


^(i  K VOLUTIONS    OF    A    liUUiADK — PART     V. 

470.  These  arrangements  bc-ing  made,  the  general 
will  add  : 

2.   Guides  on  the  line. 

All.  Tliis  having  been  repeated,  it  will  be  execut- 
ed in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  B., 
No.  70G  and  following;  and  as  soon  as  the  guides  are 
asMu-ed  on  the  line,  each  colonel  will  cause  his 
battalion  to  ht  aligned  upon  its  centre  without  regu- 
lating itself  on  the  other  battalions. 

472.  All  the  battalions  being  aligned,  the  general 
will  command  : 

3.   Colors  and  (juides — Posts. 

473.  If  the  new  direction  should  throw  one  or  more 
battalions  back  from  the  position  occupied  at  halting, 
each  colonel  of  these  battalions,  as  soon  as  he 
perceives  the  necessity,  by  the  direction  of  the  colors, 
will  face  his  battalion  about,  march  it  to  the  rear,  and 
then  face  it  about  when  it  has  passed  the  new  di- 
rection. 

Article  III. 

Change  of  direction  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

474.  A  deploying  line,  marching  in  the  order  in 
battle,  when  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction,  so  as  to  throw  forward  a  wing,  'the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  follows: 

475.  If  the  left  wing  be  the  one  intended  to  be 
thrown  forward,  the  general  will  go  to  the  right  battal- 
ion, and  place  before  it,  on  the  new  diret.-tion  he  may 
wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  battle,  two  markers,  distant 
from  each  other  fifty  or  sixty  paces,  the  first  marker 
at  the  point  d'appui  for  the  right  of  the  line;  the 


Vof:  3 


EVOLUT/OAfS    or  A   Bf^/G/^D£. 


/y   // 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   A    BRIGADE — PART    V.         87 

markers  being  established,  he  will  cause  the  line  to  be 

prolonged  by  mounted  officers. 

476.  These  dispositions  made,  the  general  will 
command : 

1.   Change   direction   to   the   right.      2.  March    (or 
do  uble-quick — Ma  r  c  h)  . 

477.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated,  the 
movement  will  commence  ;  each  battalion  will  change 
direction  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in 
the  S.  5.,  No.  718  and  following:  the  right  battalion 
will  wheel  until  it  is  parallel  to  the  new  line  of  battle  ; 
its  colonel  will  then  direct  it  forward,  halt  it  four 
paces  within  the  markers,  and  command:  1.  Color 
and  general  guides — Ox  the  Line. 

478.  The  color-bearer  and  general  guides  will  face 
to  the  general  ])laced  on  the  right  of  the  line,  who 
will  then  establish  them  on  the  new  direction; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  add :  2. 
Guides — Ox  the  Line.     3.  On  the  centre— Drkss. 

479.  As  each  battalion  has  sufficiently  disengaged 
itself  by  wheeling,  its  colonel  will  add:  Forward — 
March  ;  at  this,  the  battalion  will  resume  the  direct 
march.  * 

480.  The  colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will  so 
direct  it  as  to  cause  it  to  arrive  parallelly  to  the  new 
line  ;  and,  to  this  end,  he  will  cause  it  to  execute 
successively  slight  changes  of  direction  in  proportion 
as  it  advances  toward  the  line. 

481.  Its  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  advance,  place 
himself  on  the  line,  and  establish  upon  it  two  mark- 
ers, as  indicated  No.  475. 

482.  The  colonel  of  the  second  having  halted  his 
battalion  at  four  paces  from  the  new  line,  will  com- 
mand :  1.   Color  and  general  guides — Ox  the  Line. 

483.  At  this,  the   color-bearer   and  two  general 


88  KVOLUnONS    of    a    URKJADE— I'AKl     V. 

guides  of  the  second  battalion  will  face  to  the  ripht, 
and  promptly  place  tlumselvcs  on  the  line  of  battle. 
The  senior  major,  ficm  the  rear  of  ihu  left  general 
guide,  will  alijin  them  correctly  on  these  of  the  first 
battalion  ;  which  beinp:  executed,  the  colonel  will 
add:  2.  Guides — On  the  Line.  8.  On  the  centre — 
Dress. 

484.  Each  of  the  remaining  battalions  will  conform 
itself  to  what  is  just  presoibed  lor  the  second. 

485.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will 
precede  it  on  the  line,  by  about  one  hundnd  paces, 
and  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  lor  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second. 

486.  The  general,  or  the  officer  whom  he  may 
substitute,  placed  on  the  right  of  tlie  line,  will 
take  care  that  the  colors  of  the  fust  two  battalions  are 
correctly  assured  on  the  new  direction  ;  and  when 
the  last  battalion  is  established  on  the  line,  he  will 
command : 

3.   Colors — Posts. 

487.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  left,  in  order 
to  throw  forward  the  right  wing,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 


REMARKS  Oy  CHANGES  OK  DIRKCTION  MARCHING  IX  I-INE   OV 
BATTLE. 

488.  The  means  prescribed  for  changing  the  di- 
rection of  a  line  marching  in  the  order  in  battle, 
whether  to  throw  forward,  or  to  refuse  one  of  its 
wings,  give  the  facility  of  establishinc  a  line  on  any 
direction  that  may  be  dc(  nicd  best,  without  breaking 
the  battalions  into  subdivisions. 

489.  The  battalions,  marching  in  echelons,  are 
recij)rocally  protected  ;  and  if,  before  the  end  of  the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    IJHIGADI-: — PAUT       V.      89 

movement,  it  should  become  necessary  to  reform  the 
line,  the  battalions  not  yet  on  the  new  direction,  say 
the  third  and  iburth,  inclusive,  may  form  themselves 
into  a  full  line,  by  an  opposite  change  of  direction  to 
the  one  they  were  engaged  in  executing.  This  line 
would  form  an  angle  with  the  first  already  establish- 
ed on  the  new  direction. 

Article  IV. 

To  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 

490.  The  line  being  halted,  when  the  general  shall 
wish  to. cause  it  to  march  in  retreat  he  Avill  com- 
mand : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear. 

491.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
command :  Battalion,  about — Face  ;  when  the  line 
will  face  about,  each  battalion  conforming  itself  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  731. 

492.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

2.   The  ( — )  the  battalion  of  direction. 

493.  At  this,  the  colonels  and  lieutenant-colonels 
will  conform  themselves,  within  their  respective  bat- 
talions, to  what  is  indicated  in  the  S.  B.,  'No.  733  ; 
and  the  colonel  of  the  directing  battalion  will  cause 
markers  to  be  established  as  prescribed  No.  734  of  the 
same  school.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the 
general  will  add : 

3.  Battalions,  forward. 

494.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  color-rank, 
the  general  guides  of  each  battalion,  the  captains, 


yO         KVOLUTIOXS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

coverin-j:  sergeants,  and  file-closers,  will  conform  them- 
selvts  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.  The  gen- 
eral will  then  command  : 

4.  Maiicii  (  01- do uble-r/ nick — March). 

495.  The  line  will  march  in  retreat  acciording  to 
the  i)rinciples  prescribed  for  advancing  in  line  of 
battle. 

Articlk  V. 

To  halt  the  line  marching  in  retreat,  and  to  align  it. 

495.  A  deployed  line,  marching  in  retreat,  will  be 
halted  by  the  same  commands  as  a  line  marching  in 
advance  ;  and  wlam  the  general  shall  wish  to  reface 
it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  to  the  front. 

497.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
conmiand ;  Battalion^  about — Face;  when  the  line 
will" face  about,  each  battalion  conforming  itself  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  J5.,  No.  745. 

Article  VI. 

Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  retreat. 

4  98.  A  deployed  line,  marching  in  retreat,  if  the 
general  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  in  order 
to  refuse  the  one  or  other  wing,  he  will  cause  the 
movement  to  be  executed  as  iblU)ws: 

499.  It  will  be  supposed  that  it  is  the  left  wing, 
become  the  right,  that  the  general  wishes  to  refuse ; 
he  will  pass  to  the  right  battalion,  now  the  left,  and 
establish  two  markers  before  it,  on  the  new  direction 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — rAllT    V.         91 

which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  liae,  in  the  manner 
I  prescribed  for  changing  direction  in  marching  in  ad- 
\    vance  ;  he  will  then  command  : 

1.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 

500.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
[     add: 

'  2.  'MxRCU  (^or  double-quick — March). 

501.  This,  briskly  repeated,  every  battalion  will 
commence  its  change  of  direction  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  751. 

502.  The  first  battalion  will  wheel  until  it  find 
itself  parallel  to  the. markers;  the  colonel  will  then 
march  it  forward,  cause  it  to  cross  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  sliall  have 
passed  four  paces  beyond  this  line,  he  will  halt  the 
battalion,  face  it  about,  and  establish  it  on  the  line 
by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  Nos.  482-3. 

503.  The  colonel  of  each  of  the  other  battalions 
■  will  direct  it  toward  the  line  of  battle  as  indicated 

Nos.  4  79-80,  so  that  it  may  be  paralle^l  to  this  line 
several  pac^es  before  arriving  upon  it;  the  colonel 
will  then  cause  the  battalion  to  pass  the  line,  and 
when  four  paces  beyond  it  he  will  halt  and  face  the 
battalion  about ;  he  will  then  establish  it  on  the  line 
by  the  means  prescribed  for  changing  direction  ad- 
vancing. 

504.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  481  and  485,  and 
the  general  to  what  is  indicate*!  No.  486. 

505.  Chanijes  of  direction  to  the  right,  in  order  to 
refuse  the  right  wing,  become  the  left,  wjll  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 


02  KVOI.L'TIONS    OF    A    HRIGADE — PART    V. 

506.  A  (l('])1oyc(l  line  on  a  march  will  be  marched 
in  retreat  Avithoiit  lialtin<r,  by  tlie  conimnnds  and 
iiH'ans  pre^ciibed  Ko.  400  and  ibllo'\vin<T,  ob^ervinp: 
what  Ibilows.  The  command,  right  (thotif,  will  be 
substituted  for  face  to  the  rear^  and  the  second  and 
third  commands  will  be  omitted. 

Article   VII. 

March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  battalions  in  col- 
umns. 

507.  The  march  in  line  of  battle  of  a  deployed 
line,  presentinnr  many  difficulties,  particularly  if  the 
ground  be  not  favorable,  it  may  frequently  be  ad- 
vantageous to  ploy  each  l>aftalion  into  column,  and 
to  cause  the  line  to  march  in  this  order,  -preserving 
between  every  two  battalions  the  interval  necessary 
for  deployment. 

508.  The  general  wishing  to  ploy  or  to  break 
each  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the  centre  or 
into  simple  column,  either  by  division  or  by  com- 
pany, will  command : 

1.  Movement  ly  battalion. 

500.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  general  will 
give  the  commands  of  caution  prescribed  in  the  S. 
B.  for  the  particular  formation  into  column  which  he 
may  desire  to  have  executed. 

510.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  each 
colonel  will  give  the  preparatory  commands  required 
for  the  particular  movement  indicated  by  the 
general. 

511.  The  general  will  then  add: 

2.  March  (or  douhU-quick — March). 


to 
lie 

to 


ia3 
er- 
he 
I  of 

cc- 
l: 


ion 
his 
;ab- 
,he 
ace 
lion 
lace 
xme 

les- 
tion 


fthe 

will 

)tlier 


£^0 LUr/of/S    OrA    Bf^/04O£ 


-^   -i      -en 


illL.    ^   ill''  ..J 


■vj'jiia'-'" 


^- 


^iir"'*-^!! 


--e -=g^<?-^- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    HRIGADK — PART    V.  93 

512.  At  this,  each  battah'on  will  ploy  itself  into 
column  in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the  JSchool  of  the 
Battalion. 

513.  The  line  thus  formed,  will  march  according  to 
the  same  principles  as  a  line  of  battalions  deployed, 
but  observing  what  follows  : 

1st.    To  cause  the  line  of  column n  to  advance. 

514.  It  will  be  supposed  that  each  battalion  has 
been  ployed  into  double  column,  and  that  the  gener- 
al has  chosen  the  third  as  the  directing  battalion  ;  he 
will  go  to  this  battalion,  see  whether  the  direction  of 
its  guides  be  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  rec- 
tify the  direction,  if  necessary,  and  then  command  : 

1.   The  third  the  battalion  of  direction. 

515.  The  colonel  of  each  subordinate  battalion 
having  repeated  this  command,  will  see  whether  his 
guides  on  the  side  of  the  directing  battalion  be  estab- 
lished perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle;  if  not,  he 
will  make  the  necessary  rectification,  and  then  place 
himself  thirtv  paces  to  the  rear  on  the  prolongation 
of  those  guides;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place 
himself  a  like  distance  in  front,  and  on,  the  same 
perpendicular. 

516.  The  colonel  of  the  directing  battalion  will  es- 
tablish in  the  rear  two  markers  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  guides,  as  prescribed  No.  432. 

517.  The  general  will  now  command : 

2.  Battalions,  foricai'd. 

518.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
directing  battalion  and  the  colonel  to  his  left  will 
immediately  command :  Guide  right,  and  the  other 
colonels.  Guide  left. 


01  EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — PART    V. 

51 D.  At  this,  the  riijht  general  guide  of  each  bat- 
talion Avill  place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of  its  head- 
most guide  ;  he  -will  be  assured  on  the  perpendicular 
by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  immediately  take 
points  on  the  ground,  as  ]n'escribed  for  the  color- 
bearer  in  the  -S'.  />.,  No.  Col  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
■will  then  fall  back  to  the  side  of  his  lu'admost  guide. 

520.  The  chief  of  each  leading  division  -will  take 
post  in  the  front  rank  of  his  division,  on  the  (lank 
opposite  to  that  of  direction,  and  the  guide  who  was 
there  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

521.  .The  senior  major  will  place  himself  in  rear  of 
the  guides  charged  with  the  direction. 

522.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  add  : 

3.  March  (or  (Jouhle-quick — !Marcii). 

523.  At  this,  repeated  with  the  utmqst  rapidity, 
the  line  will  step  oiF  with  life. 

524.  The  right  general  guide  of  each  battalion  will 
direct  his  march  perpendicularly  to  the  fiont,  and 
the  leading  guide  will  follow  exactly  in  his  trace. 

525.  Tlu»  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  main- 
tain himself  abn^ast  with  his  guide  on  the  opjiosite 
flank,  and  see  that  the  march  of  the  division  be  in 
conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  5. 
B.^  No.  667.  The  other  divisions  will  conform  them- 
selves to  the  rules  for  marching  in  column, 

526.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  senior  major  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  »S^. 
B.,  Nos.  223-4. 

527.  Evf^ry  colonel,  placed  on  the  side  of  direction, 
will  superintend  the  march  of  his  battalion  In  column 
and  labor  to  preserve  its  interval. 

528.  As  the  directing  battalion  has  to  be  regarded 
as  infallible  by  all  the  others,  the  general  will  attach 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.         95^ 

himself  to  it,  aud  with  the  jD:reatest  care  maintain  the 
general  guide  and  guides  of'tliis  battalion  on  the  per- 
pendicular, -according  to  the  principles  established 
No.  440. 

529.  If  the  ilirection  given  to  this  battalion  lias 
been  badly  chosen,  the  general  will  proijiptly  per- 
ceive it  by. the  crowdings  and  openings  among  the 
fdes.of  the  headmost  division,  according  to  the  side 
to  which  the  guide  deviates  from  the  perpendicidar. 
Those  irregularities,  although  l(jss  sensible  than  they 
would  be  in  a  deployed  battalion,  will  nevertheless 
sufficiently  show  that  the  false  direction  of  the  gen- 
eral guide  ought  to  be  promptly  corrected. 

530.  Colonels  of  the  subordinate  battalions  will 
look  with  so  much  the  greater  care  to  the  preserva- 
tion of  intervals,  as  a  fi\ult  committed  in  this  respect 
will  not  be  as  promptly  perceived  as  in  a  deployed 
line. 

531.  In  every  battalion  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
perform  tlie  duty  attributed  to  the  senior  major  in 
the  5.  B.,  No.  G71,  as  often  as  the  colonel  may  wish 
to  ch.ange  the  point  of  direction. 

532.  The  line  of  battalions  in  columns  being  in 
march,  when  a  subordinate  battalion  encounters  an 
obstacle,  this  battalion  will  turn  it  in  a  manner  so  as 
to  deviate  tli^?.  least  from  the  direction  it  ought  to 
follow,  and  take  the  double-quick  step  as  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B.,  No.  7G1,  in  order  to  return  into  line  as 
soon  as  the  obstacle  is  passed.  When  again  in  line, 
the  battalion  will  be  careful  to  re-establish  its- inter- 
val by  insensible  degrees. 

533.  If  it  be  an  interior  battalion  that  has  to  exe- 
cute the  passage  of  an. obstacle,  the  next  battalion 
toward  the  side  of  the  direction  will  take  care  to 
keep  a  double  interval  until  the  former  battalion 
comes  a2ain  into  line. 


, 'JG         KVOI.UTIONS    OF    A    BRLGADK  —  PART    V. 
nEMAUKS  ON  THE  MARCH  OF  A  LINE  OF  BATTALION  COLUMNS 

WITH  ni:i'i,r>vi>-o   intervals. 

534.  It  has  been  supposed  above  that  the  battal- 
ions of  the  line  were  ployed  into  double  columns; 
but  the  rules  just  prescribed  are  equally  applicable 
to  a  line  of  battalion  columns  formed  in  any  other 
manner. 

o35.  When  the  battalions  of  the  line  are  in  simple 
columns,  the  directing  battalion  will  take  the  guide 
to  the  left  or  right,  according  as  it  may  have  the  right 
or  letl  in  front,  and  the  subordinate  battalions  will 
take  the  guide  on  the  side  next  to  the  directing  bat- 
talion. 

536.  With  the  right  in  front,  the  right  general 
guide  in  each  battalion  will  be  charged  with  its  "di- 
rection ;  the  left  general  guide  in  the  reverse  case. 

537.  If  the  battalions  be  in  masses,  each  colonel 
will  hold  himself,  pending  the  march,  at  thirty  paces 
in  the  rear  of  his  battalion,  on  the  prolongation  of  its 
guides ;  the  columns  being  at  half-distance,  each  colo- 
nel will  hold  himself  on  the  flank  of  his  column  on  the 
side  of  the  direction. 


2d.   To  halt  the  line  of  cohimnn,  and  to  deploy  it. 

538.  A  line  of.battalions  in  columns  will  be  halted 
by  the  same  commands  as  a  line  of  battalions  de- 
ployed. 

539.  The  line  being  at  a  halt,  if  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  general  to  give  a  general  alignment,  he  will  con- 
form himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  363  and  fol- 
lowing. 

540.  If  the  battalions  be  in  columns  at  half-Jistance, 
and  the  general  shall  wish  to  deploy  them,  he  will 
halt  the  line  by  these  commands  : 


U7 

dde- 

will 

the 
:bey 


tbe 
sub- 
ploy 

itcd, 
the 

bat- 
ould 
.ove- 
iples 


ig  to 
al  to 
1  es- 
front 
lion ; 
icers 
\ated 
:)ther 
.ispo- 


EvoLuri  oni   OP  ^ 


m\\ 


111 


■5^ 


e  11       fi 


im 


%iyc 


'11  i  I 


iTlDy 


—  :      -ctj 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.         1)7 

1.   Columns,  close  in  mass.     2.  March  for  double- 
quick — March). 

511.  At  the  command  march,  each  battalion  -will 
close  up  on  its  leading  subdivision. 

542.  The  line  being  halted  and  aligned,  if  it  be  the 
wish  of  the  general  to  deploy  the  battalions,  and  they 
are  in  double  columns,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Deploy  columns.     2.  March  for  double-quick — 
March). 

543.  If  the  battalions  be  in  simple  columns,  the 
general  will,  in  his  first  command,  designate  the  sub- 
division on  which  each  battalion  ought  to  deploy 
itself. 

544.  In  both  cases  the  movements  will  be  executed, 
in  every  battalion,  in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  battalion. 

545.  If  the  general  does  not  wish  to  halt  the  bat- 
talion columns  when  they  close  in  mass,  and  should 
he  also  wish  to  deploy  while  on  the  march,  the  move- 
ments will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  S.  D. 

?>d.    The  line  of  columns  marching  in  advance,  to  cause  it  to 
vhanr/c  direction. 

546.  A  line  of  battalions  in  columns,  marching  to 
the  front,  and  it  being  the  wish  of  the  general  to 
cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  es- 
tablish two  markers  on  the  new  line  of  battle  in  front 
of  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the  right  battalion  ; 
he  will  at  the  same  time  charge  two  mounted  officers 
to  determine  successively,  in  the  manner  indicated 
No.  264  and  following,  the  points  at  which  the  other 
battalions  ought  respectively  to  arrive ;  these  dispo- 
sitions made,  he  will  command  : 

8 


P8  EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

1.  Change  direction  to  the  rir/ht.    2.  Maucji  (or  dotihle- 
qiuck — March). 

547.  The  first  command  hivinfj  been  ropoatod, 
each  colonel  will  cause,  liis  battalion  to  take  the  iruide 
to  tlie  right,  it"  that  be  not  already  the  dircctint; 
flank;  at  the  same  time  the  chief  of  the  leading  di- 
vision in  each  battalion  will  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  division,  and  the  general  guide,  charged 
■with  the  direction,  will  retire.  If  the  columns  be 
closed  in  mass,  the  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will 
cause  his  battalion  to  take  the  guide  to  the  left. 

548.  At  the  conmiand  march,  the  colonel  of  the 
right  battalion  will  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the 
right,  and  then  direct  it  against  the  two  markers 
placed  by  the  general ;  when  its  leading  division  is  at 
three  paces  from  the  markers,  the  colonel  will  halt  the 
battalion  ;  if  the  rear  divisions  have  not  yet  entered 
the  new  direction,  their  chiefs  will  promptly  bring 
them  into  it,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  established  on  it 
the  colonel  will  align  the  battalion  by  the  right. 

54!).  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  direct  his  bat- 
talion toward  the  new  line  of  battle,  so  that  its  leading 
division  may  be,  when  at  a  distance  etjual  to  the 
depth  of  a  column,  parallel  to  that  line  ;  to  this  end, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  guides  of  this  division  to  ad- 
vance, insensibly  and  successively,  the  left  shoulder; 
and  when  this  guide  has  arrived  at  three  paces  from 
the  line  of  battle  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion, 
and  cause  it  to  be  aligned  by  the  right. 

550.  At  the  beginning  of  the  movement,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel of  the  second  battalion  will  place  him- 
self on  the  line  of  battle,  and  replace  the  mounted 
officer  whom  the  general  had  sent  thither  ;  he  will  im- 
mediately establish  two  markers  for  the  head  of  his 
battalion,  the  first  at  deploying  distance  from  the  bat- 
talion to  the  right,  and  the  second  at  division  distance 


EVOLUTIONS    or    A    nRIGADK — PAKT    V.  99 

iVom  tlic  first;  tlie  liciitonant--colonel  of  each  of  the 
other  battalions  will  place  himself  in  like  manner  on 
the  line  of  batlb,  when  the  head  of  his  battalion  is  at 
a  hundred  paces  from  this  line. 

551.  The  last  battalion  column  being  established 
on  the  line,  the  general  will  command : 

3.  Guides — Posts.' 

552.  Changes  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  ex- 
ecuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

553.  l\^  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  the  columns 
to  deploy,  he  will  give  the  order  to  that  eftect  to  the 
colonels,  who  will  cause  their  battalions  to  close  up  in 
halting,  and  then  deploy  them. 

4.^/*.    To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  march  in  retreat. 

554.  A  line  ofbattalions,  in  columns,  being  halted, 
when  the  general  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in 
retreat  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank. 

555.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  battalion 
will  face  by  the  rear  rank;  the  chief  of  the  last 
division  of  each  battalion  will  place  himself  in  the 
rear  rank,  become  the  front  on  the  side  opposite 
to  that  of  the  direction  ;  the  chief  of  each  first  di- 
vision wiil  take  his  place  in  the  column. 

bbQ.  The  line  being  thus  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  it 
will  be  put  in  march  by  the  same  commands  and 
means  as  a  line  ofbattalions  in  columns  faced  by  the 
front  rank,  observing  to  establish  markers  before  the 
directing  battalion,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  B.,  No.  734. 


100        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    RnKJADF — PART    V. 

557.  The  line  marchin<>  in  retreat  -will  conform 
itself  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  a  line  of  battal- 
ions in  columns  marching  in  advance. 

bth.    To  halt  the  line  of  columns  marching  in  retreat,  and  to 
align  it. 

558.  The  line  marcliins;in  retreat  will  be  halted  by 
the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  marching  in  ad- 
vance ;  and  when  the  general  shall  wish  to  face 
it  about  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  hij  the  front  raid: 

559.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  battalion 
will  be  faced  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  in  each  will  retake  his  place  in  line,  and  the 
chief  of  each  last  division  his  in  column. 

C)th,    The  line  of  columnH  inarching  in  retreat,  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction. 

5G0.  The  line,  marching  in  retreat,  will  change 
direction  l)y  the  same  commands  and  means  as  if  it 
marched  by  the  front  rank,  observing  what  follows: 

5(j1.  The  two  markers  established  by  the  general 
before  the  position  to  be  occupied  at  halting  by  the 
first  battalion,  instead  of  being  opposite  to  the  right 
and  left  files  respectively  of  the  leading  division,  will 
be  far  enough  apart  to  permit  this  battalion  to  cross 
the  line  of  battle  between  them,  and  the  same  of  the 
markers  established  for  the  other  battalions. 

562.  Eaidi  colonel  will  direct  his  battalion  toward 
the  line  of  battle  as  prescribed  for  a  change  of  direc- 
tion forward,  and  so  that  all  its  divisions  may  be 
parallel  to  this  line  before  passing  it ;  when  the  first 
division,  now  in  the  rear,  is  thi-ee  paces  beyond  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  and  face  it  by 


EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    IJRIGADI': — PART    V.        101 

the  front  rank ;  the  fjuides  of  the  first  division  will 
place  themselves  on  the  line  between  tlie  two  mark- 
ers ;  and  as  soon  as  they  are  assui'ed  in  their  positions 
by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  colonel  will  align  the 
battalion  by  the  right. 

5G3.  The  general,  if  it  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the 
columns,  will  give  a  caution  to  that  effect  to  the 
colonels,  who,  in  halting,  will  each  cause  his  battal- 
ion to  close  nj)  on  its  leading  division  as  soon  as  the 
latter  has  passed  the  line  of  battle  by  a  distance 
equal  to  the  depth  of  the  column  and  three  paces 
more  ;  he  will  then  face  the  battalion  by  the  front 
rank  and  deploy  it. 

5G4.  The  line  of  battalion  columns,  in  march,  can 
be  marched  in  retreat  without  halting,  as  prescribed 
No.  oS^).  The  colonel  of  each. battalion  will  see  that 
his  interval  is  maintained. 

7th.    To  close  the  iiitervali  of  a  line  of  columns. 

565.  The  line  of  columns,  either  simple  or  double, 
being  at  a  halt,  if  the  general  should  wish  to  close  the 
intervals  between  them  to  twenty-two  paces,  on  any 
battalion,  say  the  third,  he  will  cause  two  markers  to 
to  be  placed  in  front  of  that  battalion,  as  indicated 
No.  411. 

5G6.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  command : 

1.   On  the  third  battalion,  clone  intervals.     2.  March 
(or  double-quick — March). 

567.  At  the  fii'st  command,  the  colonel  of  the 
third  will  caution  his  battalion  to  stand  fast;  the 
colonels  of  the  first  two  battalions  will  command : 
1.  Left  face.  2.  Battalim.  form  ird,  r/uile  rir/ht. 
The  colonel  of  the  fourth  will  command:  1.  Right 
face.     2.  Battalion,  forward^  guide  left. 


102        KVOI.UTIONS    OK    A    BRIG ADU— PART    V. 

oGS.  At  tlie  command  march,  hriskly  rcpeatod,  tho 
colonel  of  tlie  thiid  -will  establish  his  battalion  as 
prescribed  No.  295,  the  others  will  march  t'lit'ir  bat- 
talions straight-forward,  and  havinji  closed  the  inter- 
val which  should  separate  them  from  the  battalion  on 
their  left  or  right  respectively,  to  twenty-two  paces,, 
will  each  halt  his  battalion,  lace  it  to  the  front,  and 
di-ess  it  on  the  markers  established  by  the  lieutenant- 
colonels. 

569.  The  lieutenant-colonels  of  the  battalions, 
other  than  the  third,  will  execute  what  is  prescribed 
No.  416. 

570.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command : 

3.  Guides — Posts. 

5  71.  These  battalions  may  again  be  made  to  re- 
sume their  positions  in  line  of  battle,  with  deploying 
intervals,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
No.  411  and  following. 

5  72.  A  line  of  battalions  in  mass  can  be  closed  or 
opened  while  on  a  march  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  No.  5G5  and  following,  and  No.  41 1 
and  following,  observing  what  follows.  The  line  Avill 
not  be  niaiked  in  advance,  and  the  colonels  on  the 
right  and  left  of  the  directing  battalion  will  estab- 
lish their  battalions  at  the  proper  intervals,  by  caus- 
ing them  to  oblique  to  the  right  or  left,  as  the  case 
may  be. 

Article  VIII. 

March  in  line  of  battle,  of  a  line  of  deployed  battal- 
ions, by  the  flanks  of  companies. 

5  73.  A  line  of  deployed  battalions,  either  at  a  lialt 
or  in  march,  will  advance  or  retire  by  the  flanks  of 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.   '     lOS 

companies,  by  the  commands  prescribed,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  means  indicated  No.  507  and  Ibllowing. 

5  74.  The  line  thus  formed,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  a 
march,  advancing  or  retiring,  will  be  reformed  by  the 
commands  prescribed  in  tlie  *S'.  B.,  No.  150  and  follow- 
ing, and  means  indicated  No.  507  and  following,  of 
these  evolutions. 


Articlk  IX. 

Mai'ch  in  line  of  battle,  of  a  line  of  battalions  formed 
in  division  columns. 

575.  A  deployed  line,  either  in  a  halt  or  on  the 
march,  will  advance  or  retire,  in  division  columns,  by 
the  commands  and  means  indicated  No.  507  and  fol- 
lowing. 

576"  Double  columns  will  be  formed  from  the  divis- 
ion columns,  and  reciprocally,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  battalion.  The  division  columns  will 
deploy,  as  prescribed  in  the  same  school. 

HEMARKS     ON    TlIK     PISPOSITIOX    OT    THE    ARTILLERY    WITH 
LINES  OF  BATTLE. 

577.  If  the  march  is  in  line,  without  the  active 
sphere  of  battle,  the  brigade  battery  will  follow  the 
movement  in  its  place ;  but  if  a  position  is  to  bo  attack- 
ed, the  battery  will  cover  the  march  of  the  troops, 
engage  the  enemy,  and  prepare  for  the  attack. 

Article  X. 

To  pass  a  defile  in  front. 

578.  A  deployed  line  encountering,  in  advancing, 
a  defile  which  it  has  to  pass,  will  execute  the  move- 
ment as  follows ; 


104     *  EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    IJUIGADK — I'AUT    V. 

579.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  opposite 
to  the  interval  between  the  second  and  third  battal- 
ions, and  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give  passa^re  to 
the  front  of  a  company  ;  the  general,  seeing  that  the 
line  has  arrived  near  the  defile,  will  halt  it,  and  com- 
mand : 

1.    I'o  pass  (lejile  in  fronts  hy  (lie  rigid  of  (he  third  bal- 
ialiun.     2.  Bi/  platoori,  left  and  right,  into  column. 

580.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  the 
colonels  of  the  first  two  battalions  will  each  command  : 
Bg  platoon,  left  tvheel,  and  the  other  colonels:  By 
platoon,  right  tvheel. 

581.  The  general  will  then  add  : 

3.  March  (or  double-quipk — March). 

582.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  battalions  will 
break  by  platoon  to  the  left  or  right. 

583.  The  battalions  having  broken,  the  general 
will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  at  the  points 
around  which  tlie  two  columns  oUght  to  turn  in  order 
to  enter  the  defile;  the  markers  will  be  posted  a  lit- 
tle more  than  the  front  of  a  company  apart.  The 
general  will  then  command  : 

4.  Column,  forward. 

\ 

584.  This  having    been  repeateil,    each    colonel  \ 
whose  battalion  has  broken  to  the  left  will  command: 
Guide  right,  and  each  whose  battalion  has  broken  to 
the  right,  Guide  left.     The  general  will  now  add  : 

5.  March  (or  dtmhle-quick — March). 

585.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  two 


iy±ki^Il±lL^LA_Bji3  A 


EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.        105 

columns  will  march  to  meet  each  other,  and  when 
the  two  leadinir  platoons  have  arrived  opposite  to  the 
respective  markers,  they  will  turn,  one  to  the  right 
and  the  other  to  the  left,  in  order  to  unite  in  the  de- 
file ;  at  the  moment  of  union  they  will  take,  by  com- 
mand of  their  respective  chiefs,  the  platoon  on  the 
right  the  guide  to  the  left,  and  the.  left  platoon  the 
guide  to  the  right. 

586.  The  two  united  platoons  will  march  side  by 
side,  each  regulating  itself  on  the  two  guides  placed 
elbow  to  elbow  between  them ;  these  guides  will  di- 
rect themselves  by  the  defile. 

•587.  The  two  next  platoons,  and,  successively,  all 
the  others,  wjll  conform  themselves  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  two  leading  platoons  on  com- 
ing up  with  the  markers  placed  before  the  entrance 
of  the  defile.  If  tTiere  is  an  odd  battalion,  it  will 
form  in  simple  column  by  company,  behind  the  col- 
umn nearest  to  it. 

588.  The  united  platoons  will  pass  the  defile  in 
the  cadenced  pace  and  with  ranks  closed,  each  reg- 
ulating itself  on  the  two  guides  placed  in  the  centre, 
who  will  march  elbow  to  elbow  exactly  in  the  traces 
of,  and  at  platoon  distance  from,  the  guides  who  im- 
mediately precede  them. 

589.  In  proportion  as  the  two  columns  issue  from 
the  defile,  each  captain  will  reform  his  company  as 
follows  :  in  the  right  column,  the  first  platoon,  which 
is  in  rear  of  the  second  of  the  same  company,  will 
oblique  to  the  right  until  it  find  itself  unmasked,  and 
then  march  forward ;  in  the  left  column,  it  will  be 
the  second  platoon  of  each  company,  which  will 
oblique  to  the  left,  and  then  march  up  abreast  with 
its  first. 

590.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  general,  after  passing 
the  defile,  to  reform  the  line,  he  will,  immediately 
after  passing,  place  himjelf  in  advance  at  the  dis- 


106        KVOLTTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

tanco  to  wlilcli  he  may  -wish  to  establish  the  line  of 
battle,  and  ])lace  two  markers  on  this  line  for  the 
head  of  the  right  column,  and  the  two  others  for  the 
head  of  the  left,  leaving  the  interval  of  twenty-two 
pa(;es  between  the  two  colunms. 

591.  The  head  of  the  column  having  passed  the 
defde,  the  general  will  order  the  colonels  of  the  sec- 
ond and  third  battalions  to  diiect  them  resj)ectively 
on  the  markers  whicdi  he  has  established  ;  and  when 
the  leading  subdivision  of  each  of  these  battalions  has 
arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  each 
colonel  will  cause  his  battalion  to  close  in  mass  in 
halting,  and  dejjloy  their  battalions,  the  second  on  its 
last,  and  the  third  on  its  first  subdivision^ 

o92.  The  colonels  of  the  first  and  fourth  will  each, 
as  the  head  of  his  battalion  issues  from  the  defile, 
cause  it  to  change  direction,  th5  first  to  the  right 
and  the  fourth  to  the  left,  and  then  direct  it  perpen- 
dicularly toward  the  line  of  battle — the  first  at 
twenty-two  paces  from  the  right  of  the  second,  and 
the  foui-th  the  same  distance  from  the  left  of  the 
third.  In  halting,  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  each 
battalio4i  will  be  closed  in  mass  on  its  leading  com- 
pany, and  will  then  be  deployed,  the  first  on  its  last 
and  the  fourth  on  its  first  subdivision. 

593.  If,  instead  of  re-establishing  the  line,  as  in  the 
preceding  exam])le,  it  be  the  wish  of  the  general  to 
rest  one  of  the  wings,  say  the  right,  at  the  defile,  he 
will  cause  both  columns  to  take  the  guide  to  the 
right,  and  halt  them  the  instant  that  the  first  eomV 
pany  of  the  first  battalion  in  the  right  column  issues 
from  the  defile;  this  column,  composed  of  the  first 
and  second  battalions,  will  then  be  formed  io  the 
rif/hf^  and  the  left  column,  composed  of  the  third  and 
fourth  battalions,  will  close  to  half-distance  in  march- 
ing, and  form  on  the  r'ujht  into  line  of  battle. 

594.  If  it  be  the  left  wing  that  is  to  rest  at  the  de- 


KVOLUTIONS    or    A    BRIOADE — PART    V.        107 

file,  tlie  line  may  be  formed  according  to  the  same 
l)rincii)les  and  by  inverse  means. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  PASSAGE  OF    DEFILKS  IN  ADVANCING. 

§95.  The  two  columns  beinjr  formed  by  platoon,  if 
the  defile  should  widen  suflicientTy,  companies  may 
be  formed  in  each  column  without  waiting  till  the 
head  has  issued  from  the  defile. 

596.  When  a  sudden  narrowing  of  the  defile  shall 
oblige  the  chiefs  of  platoon  to  break  off,  for  the  mo- 
ment, one  or  two  files  to  the  rear,  this  diminution  ot 
front,  as  an  exception  to  the  rule  established  in  the 
.S.  i>.,  No.  810,  will  be  made  from  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide. 

597.  If  the  defile  be  of  suflicient  width  to  receive 
the  front  of  a  division,  the  general,  instead  of  causing 
the  line  to  break  Iby  platoon,  will  cause  it  to  break 
by  company;  but,  in  this  case,  the  company  that  is 
to  lead  in  each  column,  instead  of  wheeling,  will 
march  forward  twice  the  extent  of  its  front ;  and 
when  the  columns  are  put  in  movement,  these  com- 
panies will  close  upon  each  other,  marching  by  the 
Hank,  in  order  to  unite  at  the  entrance  of  the  defile. 

598.  If  the  defile  be  not  of  suflicient  width  to  re- 
ceive the  front  of  a  company,  it  will  be  passed  in 
simple  column  by  platoon,  right  or  left  in  frCnt. 

599.  The  passage  of  defiles  to  the  front  will  always 
be  executed  by  the  sr.bdi vision  of  the  right,  or  that 
of  the  left  of  a  battalion  ;  and  when  the  defile  hap- 
pens not  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  an  interval 
betAveen  two  battalions,  the  leading  subdivisions, 
after  uniting,  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  to- 
ward the  entrance  of  the  defile.. 

REM.vnKS  ox  Tin;  pisposition  op  the  companies  op  skir- 
mishers IN  passing  A  defile  TO  THE  FRONT. 

0-600.  Generally,  the  skirmishers  of  each  battalion 


108        EVOLUTIONS    OK    A    lUUGADE — PAIM     V. 

"Nvill  precede  their  battalion  companiei  in  passing  a 
defile  to  tiie  front.  In  this  case,  tlie  companies  of 
skirmishers  of  each  battalion,  under  the  command  of 
the  junior  major,  will  pass  the  defile  either  by  file, 
platoon,  or  company  front,  as  the  width  may  admit, 
those  of  the  battalions  nearest  the  defde  passing 
first. 

0-GOl.  If,  however,  the  skirmishers  are  required  to 
pass  the  defile  with  their  battalions,  the  first  com- 
pany of  each  battalion  will  be  posted  in  front  or  rear 
of  its  first-battalion  company,  closed  up  on  that  com- 
pany, and  with  a  platoon  or  company  front,  as  the 
column  may  be  formed  by  platoon  or  company.  The 
second  company  of  skirmishers  will  be  posted  in  like 
manner  in  front  or  rear  of  the  last  battalion  com- 
pany. 

REMARKS    ON    TIIK   PASSAGE    OF    THE     nEFILE    l.\  FRON'T  BY 
THE  SECOND  LINE. 

C02.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  while  the  first 
line  is  passing  the  defile  the  general  will  cause  each 
battalion  of  the  second  line  to  form  by  company  or 
platoon,  according  to  the  manner  in  which  the  first 
line  may  have  broken.  After  the  first  line  has  pass- 
ed the  dwfile,  the  corresponding  battalions  of  the  sec- 
ond will  pass  in  a  similar  manner. 


Article  XI. 
To  pass  a  defile  in  retreat.  ^ 

603.  The  line  marching  in  retreat,  and  encounter- 
ing a  defile  which  it  •  has  to  pass,  the  general  will 
cause  a  halt,  and  face  the  line  to  the  front. 

G04.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  opposite 
to  the  interval  between  the  two  centre  battalions, 


toon  or  oompaiiy  front,  as  the 
by  platoon  or  company.  The 
rmishors  will  be  posted  in  like 
ar  of  tlie  last  battalion  tom- 


GE    OF    TUB    PF-FII 
SECOXn  LIXE. 


IS  FROS-T  nv 


1  is  in  two  lines,  while  the  first 
,e  the  general  will  cause  each 
1  line  to  form  by  company  or 
;he  manner  in  which  the  first 
Ader  the  first  line  has  pass- 
jponding  battalions  of  the  sec- 
ir  manner. 


ncLE  XL 

defile  in  retreat. 

ng  in  retreat,  and  encounter- 
bas  to  pass,  the  general  will 
le  line  to  the  (ront. 
ied  that  the  defile  is  opposite 
n  the  two  centre  battalions, 


KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    URKIADE — PAIIT    V.        109 

and  its  width  sufficient  to  cjive  passage  to  the  front 
of  a  company.  The  general  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  behind  the 
file-closers,  in  front  of  the  defile,  and  at  a  little  more 
than  company  distance  apart,  in  order  to  indicate  to 
the  two  columns  the  points  around  which  they  ought 
to  change  direction  to  enter  the  defile  ;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  : 

To  the  rear,  by  the  tcingSy  pass  the  defile. 

G05.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
right  battalion  of  the  line  will  command  :  To  the  rear, 
hi/  the  rif/htfiaid-,  pass  the  defile  ;  and  the  colonel  of 
tiie  left  battalion,  To  the  rear,  hij  the  left  Jlank^  pass 
the  defile. 

606.  The  two  battalions  of  the  wings  will  imme- 
diately commence  the  movement  in  conformity  with 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  *S'.  B.,  No.  790  and  Ibllow- 
ing  ;  and  when  thfe  leading  platoon  of  each  column 
has  arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the 
])oint  for  changing  direction,  these  two  platoons  will 
turn  at  the  same  time,  one  to  the  left  and  the  other 
to  the  right,  in  (Trder  to  unite  in  the  defile.  To  this 
end,  if  the  head  of  one  of  the  columns  arrive  before 
the  other,  it  will  wait  for  the  head  of  the  correspond- 
ing battalion  before  turning.  As  soon  as  the  two 
platoons  unite  tliey  will  take,  by  command  of  their 
respective  chiefs — the  platoon,  now  on  the  left,  the 
guide  to  the  right,  and  the  other 'the  guide  to  the 
left;  the  remaining  platoons  of  these  two  battalions 
will  successively  conform  themselves  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  those  of  the  head,  and  the 
two  columns  will  thus  march  together  according  to 
the  principles  indicated  No.  586  and  following,  for 
the  passage  of  a  defile  in  front. 

607.  The  other  battalions  will  successivelv  execute 


110        E^()LUTI<)NS    or    A    DUIGADK — PART    V. 

the.  same  movement;  the  colonel  of  each  will  ^'ivo.  one 
of  the  comm;ind3  prescribed  No.  60.),  aecording  as 
his  battalion  has  to  ])a?s  the.  defile  by  the  riiiht  or 
leit  Hank,  and  so  that  its  leading  j)latoon  may  follow, 
at  the  desired  distance,  the  rearmost  j)latoon  of  the 
battalion  immediately  preceding  ;  the  battalions  will 
enter  thcdefiki  side  by  side,  as  prescribed  for  the  two 
battalions  of  the  wings. 

G08.  If  the  defde  become  of  sufFicient  width  to  give 
passage  to  a  division  marching  by  the  front,  each 
captain,  as  his  platoons  successively  enter  the  en- 
larged width,  will  cause  them  to  tbrm  company  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  j)rescribed  No.  580  ;  other- 
wise, this  movement  will  only  be  executed  as  each 
company  issues  from  the  defde. 

600.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  general,  after  passing, 
to  reform  line  facing  to  the  defile,  he  will  go  either 
to  the  point  at  which  he  may  wish  the  left  of  the  first 
battalion  to  rest,  or  to  the  point  at  which  he  may 
wish  the  right  of  the  fourth  or  last  battalion  to  rest, 
and  determine  the  direction  of  the  new  line  of  battle 
by  establishing  two  markers,  distant  from  each 
other  a  little  more  than  the  front  of  a  subdivision  ;  he 
will  then  cause  the  line  to  be  prolonged  to  the  left 
and  right  by  mounted  officers. 

GIO.  As  each  battalion  clears  the  defile,  it  will 
break  froni  the  column,  and  be  directed  toward  the 
point  at  which  it  should  cross  the  line  of  battle. 

Gil.  Each  battalion  will  close  in  mass  while 
mai-ching,  and  be  so  directed  as  to  arrive  on  t^ 
square  with  the  line,  and  when  four  ])aces  beyond  it\ 
will  be  halted  by  the  colonel,  countermarched,  and 
deployed,  the  first  and  second  battalions  on  their  last, 
and  the  third  and  fourth  battalions  on  their  first  sub- 
divisions. 

G12.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will 
pi-e<'ede  it,  as  prescribed  in  No.  2G9,  and  establish 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.        Ill 

two  markers,  the  first  at  deploying  distance  and 
twenty-two  paces  from  the  one  on  his  riixht  or  left,  as 
tlie  formation  is  on  the  left  or  righ^-^— 'he  soeond  a 
little  more   than  snlxiivision   distance  I'rom   the  first. 

613.  The  defile,  in  the  preceding  exanij^le,  has 
been  supposed  to  l)e  behind  the  centre  of  the  line 
composed  of  an  even  number  of  battalions ;  but  it 
may  frequently  be  otherwise.  For  instance  :  it  may 
be  that  there  are  three  battalions  on  the  right,  and 
only  one  on  the  left  side  of  the  defile.  In  this  case 
the  general  would  first  send  an  order  to  the  colonels 
of  the  first  and  second  battalions  to  pass  the  defile  in 
simple  column  in  advance,  and  then,  seizing  the 
jn-oper  time,  give  the  command  indicated  No.  G04,  so 
that  there  may  be  no  interruption  in  the  movement. 
So,  if  the  line  present  an  odd  number  of  battalions,  a 
fiimilar  course  would  be  pursued  in  respect  to  the  odd 
battalion  on  the  riglit  or  left  of  the  defile. 

614.  When  the  defile  happens  to  be  behind  the 
right  or  left  battalion  of  the  line,  the  general  Avill 
cause  it  to  pass  by  a  single  wing:  to  this  end,  he  will 
substitute  in  his  command  the  indication  hij  the  left 
wing  or  hjj  the  ru/ht  ivitig,  for  that  of  hi/  the  uu'nf/s. 
The  movement  •vill  commence  by  the  wing  farthest 
from  the  defile,  so  that  the  battalion  opposite  to  it 
may  be  the  last  to  enter. 

UKM.VRKS     ON     THE    DISPOSITIOX     GV    THE     SKIRMISHUUS     IN- 
PASSING  THE  DEFILE  IN  KETREAT. 

0-G15.  Jf  it  is  not  the  intention  of  the  general  to 
open  the  fire  of  the  line  before  passing  the  defile  in 
retreat,  the  skirmishers  will  generally  cover  the  re- 
treat, and  not  pass  until  the  line  has  passed.  If,  on 
the  contrary,  the  general  intends  to  open  the  fire  of 
the  line,  the  skirmishers  will  generally  pass  the  de- 
file previous  to  the  line,  those  of  the  battalions  near 
the  defile  passing  first. 


112        KVOI.UTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

REMARKS    ON   THE   PASSINCr   OF    TniC  DEFILE   IN  IlETllKAT    BY 
TUB  SKCOND   LINE. 

616.  If  the  "formation  is  in  two  lines,  the  general 
will,  accordiuii  to  the  width  of  tlie  doQle,  and  ])revious 
to  passing  the  defile  by  the  first  line,  cause  ca'.-h  bat- 
talion of  the  second  line  to  take  the  formation  indicat- 
ed No.  602.  The  battalions  will  then  countermarch, 
and  pass  the  defile  previous  to  the  first  line,  and  as 
prescribed  in  the  same  paragraph. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  7>1SP0SITI0N  OF  THE  ARTILLI'.RV  IN   PASS- 
ING DEFILE  IN  FRONT,  OR  IN  RETREAT. 

617.  In  passing  the  defile  to  the  front,  the  battery 
will  habitually  follow  immediately  after  the  first  two 
battalion  columns  that  pass. 

618.  In  passing  defile  in  retreat,  should  a  stand  be 
made  by  the  line  at  its  entrance,  the  battery,  or  a  por- 
tion of  it,  will  generally  take  a  position  to  assist  in 
sustaining  the  line,  and  will  pass  the  defiled  immediately 
in  front  of  the  two  last  battalion  columns.  In  case  it 
is  not  intended  that  the  line  should  make  a  stand,  the 
battery  will  generally  pass  the  defile  in  front  of  the 
battalion  columns.  The  disposition  of  the  battery 
must,  however,  depend  greatly  upon  circumstances. 

AUTICLK  XII. 
Changes  of  front.  ^ 

Perpendicular  changes  of  front. 

\st.    Cliancjn  of  front  foricnyd. 

619.  The  line  being  deployed,  and  the  general 
wishing  to  cause  it  to  change  front  on  the  rigiit, 
he  will  first  determine  the  direction  of  the  new  line 


ey06i/r/O//S  Of-  A    BR/O/iDE 


OTvfhTsl   'bouttcd-vovy   {  2{9   619] 


'% 


Mb 


!§ 


% 


^ 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    RRIGADE — rART    V.        113 

of  battle,  cause  two  markers  lo  be  placed  on  it  before 
the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the  riiiht  company, 
first  battalion,  and  immediately  cause  this  company  to 
be  established  against  those  markers;  he  will  at  the 
same  time  charge  two  mounted  officers  to  determine 
successively  the  points  on  the  line  at  which  the  sub- 
ordinate battalions  ought  respectively  to  arrive,  as 
indicated  No.  265  and  following.  He  will  then  com- 
mand : 

1.   Change,  front  furmard  on  the  Jirst  battalion. 

G20.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  will  immediately  cause  his  battalion  to  execute 
a  chajige  of  front  forward,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  B., 
No.  832  and  following. 

621.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  cause  his  bat- 
talion to  ploy  into  double  column,  at  company  dis- 
tance;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command:  1. 
Column^  forward ;  2.   Guide  right. 

622.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
wjll  add : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick— Mahcii). 

623.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  subordinate 
battalions  u-ill  put  themselves  in  movement  toAvard 
the  line  of  battle  ;  the  leading  guide  of  each,  advanc- 
ing the  left  shoulder,  will  so  direct  himself  that, 
on  aruiving  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  right  marker, 
placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  he  may 
find  himself  at  a  distance  from  the  line  of  battle  equal 
to  the  depth  of  the  column. 

■624.  The  head  of  each  battalion  having  arrived  at 
this  point  will  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  march 
perpendicularly  up  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at 
three  paces  from  this  line  its  colonel  will  cause  the 
column  to  close  in  mass  and  to  deploy. 
9 


IM        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — PART    V. 

625.  Each  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  side  of 
the  direction,  abreast  with  the  leadinij  division  of  his 
battalion,  pending  its  march  toward  the  line  of 
battle. 

G2().  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  place  themselves 
in  advance  on  the  line,  as  prescribed  No.  550,  for 
changes  of  direction  of  a  line  of  battalions  in 
columns. 

627.  I'he  line  being  formed,  the  general  will  com- 
mand : 

3.  Colors— Yosts. 

628.  A  line  will  change  front  forward  on  its  lefV., 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

2d.    Ch>nige  affront  to  the  rear. 

620.  To  change  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  of 
the  line,  the  general  will  cause  the  right  company, 
iirst  battalion,  to  be  established  on  the  new  direction, 
and  place  two  markers  before  this  company,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  .S'.  B.,  No.  852  ;  he  will  then  commafid: 

1.   Change  front  to  the  rear.,  on  the  first  battalion. 

630.  This  having  been  repeated,  the  colonel  of  the 
first  will  immediately  cause  his  battalion  to  execute  a 
change  of  iVont  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  in  the  /S. 
iJ.,  No.  854  and  following. 

631.  Each  of  the  other  colonels  will  cause  his  bat- 
talion to  ploy  into  double  column  at  company  distance, 
face  it  by  the  rear  rank,  and  then  command:  l. 
Column.,  forward ;  2.   Guide  left. 

G32.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  add  : 

2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 


K VOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — PART    V.        115 

6')3.  This  having  been  briskly  repeated,  the  sub- 
ordinate battalions  will  put  themselves  in  movement 
toward  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  leading  guide,  advancing 
the  riifht  shoulder,  will  direet  himself  as  prescribed 
No.  623, 

634.  The  leading  division  of  each  battalion  having 
arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  markers,  will  turn 
to  the  left  in  order  to  march  up  perpendicularly  to  the 
line  of  battle,  then  cross  this  line  between  the  two 
markers  placed  in  advance  by  the  lieutenant-colonel ; 
and  when  the  head  of  the  battalion  has  passed  the  line 
a  distance  equal  to  its  depth  closed  and  three  paces 
more,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  close  in 
mass,  to  face  by  the  front  rank,  r#.d  to  deploy. 

635.  The  lieutenant-colonels  will  place  themselves 
in  advance  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  establish  upon  it 
the  two  markers  as  prescribed  No.  561. 

636.  Changes  of  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  left  of  the 
line,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inverse  means. 

3d.    Central  change  of  front. 

637.  The  general  wishing  to  change  front  on  the 
third  battalion,  by  throwing  forward  the  left  wing, 
will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  direction 
he  njay  wish  to  give  to  the  new  line  before  the  posi- 
tion to  be  occupied  by  the  right  company  of  that  bat- 
talion, and  then  cause  this  company  to  be  established 
against  the  markers  ;  he  will,  at  the  same  time,  order 
the  colonel  of  the  second  to  have  the  left  company  of 
his  battalion  conducted  to  and  established  on  the 
same  alignment,  at  twenty-two  paces  from  the  right 
of  the  third  battalion. 

638.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  command ; 


lUJ        KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADK — I'AUT    V. 

1.   Change  front  on  the  third  battalion,  left  tcincj,  for- 
icard.     2.  Maucii  (cr  douhle^uick — March). 

639.  The  colonel  of  the  third  will  imuiLHliatcly  cause 
liis  battalion  to  execute  a  chan<:;e  of  front  forward  on 
it3  right  company,  and  the  colonel  of  the  second  a 
chano^e  of  front  to  the  rear  on  the  left  company  of  liis 
battalion. 

640.  The  battalion  to  the  left  of  the  third  will  exe- 
cute its  movement  as  prescribed  for  the  subordinate 
battalions  in  changes  o^  fvowt  forward  on  the  right  of 
the  line,  and  the  battalion  to  the  right  of  the  second 
will  execute  its  movement  as  indicated  ibr  changes  of 
front  to  the  rear  on  the  left  battalion. 

641.  The  general,  wishing  to  throw  the  right  wing 
forward  instead  of  the  Icfr,  will  take,  as  the  basis  of 
alignment,  the  left  company  of  the  second  battalion, 
and  command : 

1.  Change  front  on  the  second  battalion,  right  wing^  for- 
ward.    2.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

642.  The  second  and  the  battalion  to  its  right  will 
execute  a  change  of  front  forward,  on  the  left  of  the 
second  battalion. 

643.  The  third  and  the  battalion  to  its  left  will 
execute  a  change  of  front  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  of 
the  third  battalion. 

Oblique  changes  of  front. 

644.  Oblique  changes  of  front  will  be  executed  aft- 
cording  to  the  same  principles  as  the  perpendicular 
changes,  but  observing  what  follows  : 

645.  The  directing  battalion  will  conform  itself  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  872  ;  the  subor- 
dinate battalions,  after  being  ployed  into  double 
columns,  will  be  directed  toward  the  new  line  of  battle 


EV'jiUn  0  N  c    -'  / 


1 


V1 


^ 

^    ^-           ' 

-c: 

> 

-    -     o                j 

-    -      ca 

-     -     <3 

■i 

^5 

-*•   -iFi 

f 

•%    1 

^              1 

' 

a     ! 
1     i 

1                  ' 

*'^' 

nV 

i    r^  1 

-^, 


I  5 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.        117 

by  the  means  indicated  No.  549  or  No.  562,  accord- 
ing as  their, change  of  front  may  be  forward  or  to  the 
rear. 

64G.  If  the  line  is  in  march,  the  changes  of  front 
will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed No.  G19  and  following,  and  by  the  principles 
indicated  NiO.  844  and  following,  and  872  and  follow- 
ing, 5".  B,  If  the  change  is  central,  the  battalions 
wliich  should  retire  will  halt  at  the  commencement  of 
the  movement. 

REMARKS  ON  CHANGES  OF  FRONT. 

647.  In  changes  of  front,  the  general  will  always 
take  the  right  or  left  company  of  one  of  the  battalions 
as  the  basis  of  the  movement. 

Clianges  of  front  of  two  lines. 

648.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  the  first  will 
always  execute  its  movements  as  if  it  were  alone. 
The  battalions  of  the  second  line,  conducted  by  their 
colonels,  will  move  to  their  proper  posts,  taking  care 
to  preserve  their  relative  positions  with  the  corres- 
pending  battalions  of  the  first  line. 

Article  XIH. 

Order  in  echelon. 

649.  Echelons  may  be  formed  parallelly  or  ob- 
liquely to  the  line  of  battle,  either  by  the  right  or  left 
of  the  line,  and  by  battalion,  or  by  two  battalions,  as 
•will  be  explained. 

Direct  echelons  in  advancing. 

650.  The  general  wishing  to  form  direct  echelons 
by  the  right  and  by  two  battalions,  will  command : 


118        r.VOLUTIONS    OF    A    IJRIO ADK— I'AllT    V. 

1.  Echelons  hy  fwo  halialions^  at  (so  many)  paces.    2. 
Forward,  hy  the  right,  form  echelons. 

G51.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  the 
ranking  chief  of  battalion  of  the  two  right  battalions 
will  put  ihom  in  march  by  the  commands  and  means 
indic.Tted  No.  430  and  following,  ibrmar(Jiing  a  line 
in  the  order  in  battle,  and  take  the  first  as  the  direct- 
ing battalion. 

652.  The  right-  battalion  of  the  first  edielon  be- 
coming thus  the  regulator  of  the  march  of  both  the 
echelons,  the  general,  if  he  think  it  necessary,  will 
cause  markers  to  be  placed  behind  this  battalion  in 
order  to  assure  its  direction. 

653.  The  second  echelon  will,  in  succession,  put 
itself  in  march,  observing  to  maintain  between  itself 
and  the  preceding  echelon  the  number  of  paces  pre- 
scribed in  the  first  command  ;  its  commander  will 
cause  that  number  of  paces,  taken  by  the  preceding 
echelon,  to  be  counted,  before  putting  his  own  in 
march. 

654.  In  the  subordinafe  echelon,  a  file-closer,  de- 
signated in  advance,  will  place  himself  in  rear  of  and 
opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  ])receding  echelon. 
This  file-closer  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
that  file  and  abreast  with  his  own  battalion  ;  by  this 
means  the  chief  of  the  right  battalion  in  the  subordi- 
nate echelon  will  always  be  able  to  maintain  the  in- 
terval between  his  own  battalion  and  that  on  the  left 
of  the  preceding  echelon. 

655.  The  right  battalion  in  each  echelon  will  hfe 
charged  with  preserving  the  perpendicular  distance/ 
which  ought  to  separate  it  from  the  j)i'eceding  eche- 
lon ;  the  left  battalion  will  march  abreast  with  that 
on  its  right,  and  take  care  to  preserve  its  interval  to 
the  right. 

656.  The  echelon  being  in  march,  when  the  gen- 


119 

an 
iit. 
ral 
ne, 
.ish 

ch, 

,ces 

m\\ 

HE 

ach 
ace 
irst 
the 
ach 
will 

,nd, 
ed  ; 
ntil 
I  be 
.  on 

the 

jive 

and 

his 

ling 


h  in 
;om- 


iiC  LUTI  0  N  S     OF   M      B  R  I  a  A  D  E 


cp 


V" ' 


.^.^. 


la.Ua.Vu>i^^.         (N"  663J 


:  ,v  >\  *;  ^ 


,v\ 


^^"^^ 


<\'i,'^'^^' 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.        119 

/^ 

cral  shall  wish  to  reform  the  line,  he  will  give  an 
order  to  the  commander  of  the  first  echelon  to  halt  it. 
6.37.  The  first  echelon  being  halted,  the  general 
will  determine  the  direction  to  be  given  to  the  line, 
and  the  commander  of  the  first  echelon  will  establish 
it  on  that  direction. 

658.  The  second  echelon  will  continue  to  march, 
and  be  Puccessively  halted  by  its  chief  at  four  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle. 

659.  The  second  echelon  being  halted,  its  chief  will 
command:  1.  Colors  and  general  guides — On  the 
Line.  At  this,  the  colors  and  general  guides  of  each 
battalion  will  face  to  the  right,  and  promptly  place 
themselves  on  the  alignment  of  the  colors  of  the  first 
echelon;  which  being  done,  the  commander  of  the 
second  will  add:  2.  Guides — On  the  Line.  Each 
chief  of  battalion,  seeing  his  guides  established,  will 
align  his  battalion. 

<o(jQ.  Each  chief  of  echelon  will  give  the  command, 
Guides — Posts,  as  soon  as  his  echelon  is  aligned  ; 
but  the  colors  will  not  fall  back  into  their  places  until 
the  general  shall  add,  Colors — Posts,  which  will  be 
given  after  the  establishment  of  the  last  echelon  on 
the  line  of  battle. 

661.  If,  instead  of  reforming  the  line,  it  be  the 
wish  ofthe  general  to  halt  the  echelons,  he  will  give 
an  order  to  that  effect  to  the  chief  of  the  first,  and 
send  a  caution  to  the  chief  of  the  second  to  halt  his 
echelon  in  the  position  where  it  finds  itself 

662.  Echelons  by  the  left  will  be  formed  according 
to  the  same'  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Direct  echelons  in  retreat. 

663.  It  being  the  wish  of  the  general  to  march  in 
retreat  by  echelon  of  two  battalions,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


120        KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    nRlGADE— PART    V. 

1.  Echelons  hy  iwohaHalions,  at  (so  many)  paces.    2. 
In  retreat^  by  the  rirjhl^  foiTn  echelons. 

664.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  the 
commander  of  the  first  echelon  -will  cause  it  to  face 
about,  and  then  put  it  in  maich. 

6G5.  The  commander  of  the  second  echelon  -vvill 
cause  it  to  face  about,  soon  enough  to  be  able  to  put 
it  in  march  the  moment  it  has  its  distance  from  the 
first. 

606.  The  second  echelon  will  throw  out  a  file- 
closer  in  the  manner  and  ibr  the  purpose  prescribed 
No.  654. 

607.  The  general  wishing  to  reform  the  line,  will 
order  the  commander  of  the  first  echelon  to  halt  it. 

668.  This  echelon  being  lialted,  its  chief  will  face 
it  to  the  front,  and  establish  it  on  the  direction  which 
may  be  indicated  to  him. 

009.  The  second  echelon  will  continue  to  march, 
and  when  at  four  paces  beyond  the  line  of  battle  its 
chief  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  establish  it 
on  the  line  by  the  means  prescribed  Nos.  0.00  and 
600. 

670.  Echelons  in  retreat  will  be  formed  by  the  left 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Oblique  echelons, 

671.  It  being  intended  to  form  echelons  obli(|uely 
to  the  line  of  battle,  the  movement  will  be  executed 
in  the  following  manner:  \ 

6  72.  Say  that  the  movement  is  to  be  made  by  the 
right;  the  general  will  go  to  the  riglit  of  the  line, 
and  determine  the  new  direction  according  to  his 
views. 

673.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  right  battalion 
will  then,  on  an  intimation  from  the  general,  place 


EVC  LUr  I  u  M  S   C- T  A   BR/QADE 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V.        121 

Liraself  before  and  near  the  light  file  of  this  battalion ; 
then  face  to  the  left,  march  fifty  paces  along  the  front 
rank,  halt,  and  face  to  his  right;  he  will  next  march 
perpendicularly  to  the  front  of  this  battalion,  count- 
ing his  paces;  the  general,  placed  on  the  right,  will 
halt  him  the  ijioment  he  comes  between  himself  and 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  of  the  new  position, 
for  the  ])urpose  of  measuring  the  angle  formed  by  the 
new  and  old  directions. 

674.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  opening  of  this 
angle  is  such  that  the  lieutenant-colonel,  after  march- 
ing fifty  paces  along  the  front  of  the  battalion,  had  to 
lake  thirty  perpendicularly  forward,  to  bring  himself 
in  a  line  between  the  general  and  the  point  of  direc- 
tion to  the  left. 

6  75.  The  opening  of  the  angle  being  thus  ascer- 
tained, the  chief  of  the  first  echelon  will  immediately 
cause  it  to  change  front  forward  on  its  right  company. 

6  76.  The  general  will  then  send  an  order  to  the 
other  chief  of  echelon  to  cause  his  echelon  to  change 
front  forward  to  thirty  paces  on  its  right  company. 

6  77.  As  the  subordinate  echelon  shall  have  chang- 
ed front,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  take  its  interval  from 
the  left  of  the  echelon  on  its  right;  to  this  end,  he 
will  cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  into  column  by  com- 
pany by  the  left ;  which  being  executed,  he  will 
order  the  lefc  general  guide  of  the  left  battalion 
to  place  himself  on  the  prolongation  of  the  right 
guides  a  little  beyond  the  point  where  the  left  of  the 
echelon  will  res:  Avhen  in  line. 

6  78.  The  general  guide  being  correctly  establish- 
ed, tho  ch.ief  of  the  echelon  will  put  the  column  in 
march  in  order  to  prolong  it  on  its  line  of  battle  ;  the 
leading  guide  will  direct  himself  on  the  general 
guide,  and  when  the  right  company,  now  in  the  rear, 
shall  have  passed  twenty-two  paces  beyond  the  left  of 
the  echelon  on  its  right,  the  chief  of  the  echelon  in 
10  * 


122        EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE— rAUT    V. 

column  will  halt  it,  and  form  it  to  the  right  into  Hue 
of  battle. 

(i7l).  The  echelons  being  lluis  formed,  the  general 
will  order  the  chief  of  the  first  echelon  to  put  it  in 
march ;  the  otlwjr  chief  of  echelon  will  put  his  echelon 
in  march  as  soon  as  he  sees  the  preceding  one  in 
movement. 

680.  The  echelons  thus  disposed  will  march,  be 
halted,  or  reformed  into  line,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  No.  650  and  Ibllowiug,  for  direct 
echelons. 

681.  Echelons  will  be  formed  objiquely  by  the  left 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

REMARKS    ON    Til  K    OUDKR    I\    KCHKI.OX. 

682.  The  distance  between  echelons  can  not  be 
fixed,  the  number  of  paces  necessarily  depending  on 
the  views  of  the  general ;  but  it  ought  to  be  su  di  as 
to  allow  the  battalion  or  battalions  in  the  echelotis  to 
be  formed  into  s(|uares,  without  danger  of  their  hring 
into  the  other  echelons. 

683.  In  the  formation  of  obli(|ue  echelons,  the  dis- 
tance between  them  will  depend  on  the  extent  of 
their  fronts  and  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
directions;  this  distance  may  be  cither  too  great  or 
too  small ;  if  too  great,  the  general,  before  putting 
the  echelons  in  march,  will  give  an  order  to  the  chief 
of  the  subordinate  ecdielon  to  advance,  and  then  halt 
it  at  the  prescribed  distance.  1*',  on  the  contrary,  the 
distance  be  too  small,  the  subordinate  echelon  will 
only  put  itself  in  movement  when  it  has  the  given  ' 
distance  from  the  one  next  in  its  front. 

684.  In  changes  of  front,  for  the  formation  of 
oblique  echelons,  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and 
new  directions  being  necessarily  acute,  the  subordi- 
nate battalion  in  each  echelon  will  change  front  by 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   A   BRIGADE — PART   V.      123 

the  same  means  as  the  directing  one,  instead  of  ploy- 
ino  into  double  column  in  order  to  march  and  deploy 
on  the  new  line. 

685.  The  line  of  battalions,  deployed,  will  habitu- 
ally marcli  in  echelons;  but  if  the  general  judge  it 
to  be  more  advantageous,  he  may  ploy  each  battalion 
into  column  by  division,  in  rear  of  its  first  division,  if 
the  echelons  are  formed  by  the  right,  and  in  rear  of 
the  last  division  of  the  battalion,  if  the  echelons  be 
formed  by  the  left. 

686.  When  the  echelons  are  composed  of  battal- 
ions in  columns,  if  the  movement  be  by  the  right,  the 
file-closer,  who  ought  to  march  abreast  with  the 
directing  battalion  of  the  subordinate  echelon,  will 
place  himself  on  the  prolongation  of  the  right  guides 
of  the  left  battalion  in  the  echelon  preceding  his 
own,  and  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  those  guides. 
If  the  movement  be  made  by  the  left,  the  file-closer 
will  place  himself  on  the  prolongation  of  the  left 
guides  of  the  right  battalion  in  the  preceding  echelon. 

687.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  each  battalion 
of  the  second  line  will,  in  forming  echelons,  preserve 
its  relative  position  with  j-egard  to  its  corresponding 
one  of  the  first  line.  In  this  case,  echelon  by  battal- 
ion would  involve  the  movement  of  two  battalions, 
and  echelon  by  two  battalions  of  the  whole  brigade. 

Article  XIV. 
To  retreat  by  alternate  battalions. 

688.  The  retreat  by  alternate  battalions,  or  odd 
and  even  battalions,  will  be  executed  as  follows  : 

689.  The  general,  intending  to  execute  the  retreat 
by  alternate  battalions,  will  give  information  of  his 
purpose  to  the  two  next  officers  in  rank,  who  arc  re- 
spectively to  command  the  lines  of  odd  ancl  even  bat- 


1-24       r.VOLUTIONS    OF    A    lilllGADK — PART    V. 

talions,  and  at  the  same  time  indicate  to  the  one  wlio 
is  to  commence  the  movement  the  position  in  which 
he  will  halt  his  line.  The  general  Avili  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Retreat  hy  alternate  battalions.     2.   Odd  (or  ecen) 

battalions,  commence  the  movement. 

690.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  the 
officer  entitled  to  command  the  line  of  odd  battalions, 
and  which  line  it  is  supposed  ought  to  commence  the 
movement,  will  command : 

1.  Odd  battalions,  face  to  the  rear, 

691.  This  having  also  been  repeated,  the  chiefs  of 
the  designated  battalions  will  cause  them  to  face 
about. 

692.  The  commander  of  the  odd  battalions  will 
then  add : 

2.  TJie  ( — )  the  battalion  of  direction.     3.  Battalions^ 
forward,     4  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

093.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  odd  battalions,  these  battalions  will 
commence  the  march,  and  direct  themselves  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear.  The  chief  of  the  subordinate 
battalion  will  maintain  it  abreast  with  the  directing 
one,  in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  No.  454,^ 
and  when  the  line  arrives  at  the  position  indicated  by  \ 
•the  general,  the  chief  of  this  line  will  command  : 

1.  Battalions,     2.  Halt. 
each  chief  of  battalion  will  immediatelv  face  liis  bat- 


■^ct 


^T'  69J>. 


.j^___. 


i 
A 


tkti^^^ 


OHl^Q 


KVOLUTIOXS   OF    A   BRIGADE — PART   V.      125 

talion  about,  the  commander  of  the  line  will  rectify 
the  alignment  of  the  directing  battalion,  the  other 
battalion  will  be  dressed  by  that,  without  constraint, 
however,  as  to  being  absolutely  on  the  same  general 
alignment. 

695.  As  soon  as  the  odd  battalions  which  form  the 
second  line  have  faced  about,  the  chief  of  the  first 
line,  of  even  battalions,  will  command  : 

.  1.   Face  to  the  rear. 

696.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  691 ; 
the  chief  of  this  line  will  then  command  : 

2.    The  ( — )  the  battalion  of  direction.     3.  Battalions, 
forward.     4.  March  (or  doiihle-quick — March). 

697.  The  first  line  will  march  in  retreat  by  the 
means  prescribed  No.  693 ;  each  battalion  will  be 
directed  upon  the  middle  of  the  corresponding  inter- 
val in  the  second  line,  cross  this  line,  and  march  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear.  When  it  arrives  at  the 
position  indicated  by  the  general,  the  first  line  will 
be  halted  and  faced  about  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  Nos.  693  and  694. 

698.  The  second  line,  become  first,  will  execute 
the  same  movement,  and  so  on  alternately. 

699.  The  general  will  superintend  both  lines,  and 
determine,  according  to  the  ground,  the  distance  he 
may  wish  to  have  between  the  lines,  and  the  position 
each  ought  successively  to  occupy. 

To  reform  the  line. 

700.  The  general,  wishing  to  reform  the  line,  will 
cause  the  drums  to  beat  a  short  roll,  or  the  bugles  to 
sound  the  assembly,  after  the  first  line  (the  one  ac- 


12G       KVOLUriONS    of    a    IIUKJADK — TAUT    V. 

tually  in  front)  is  put  in  marcli,  which  roll  or  sound 
will  be  briskly  repeated  by  all  the  drums  or  bugles 
of  this  line. 

701.  The  battalions  of  the  first  line  will  continue 
to  march,  and  when  they  find  themselves  exactly  in 
their  intervals  of  the  second,  their  respective  colonels 
will  halt  them,  face  them  about,  and  rectify  their 
alignment;  the  general  will  then  give  a  general 
alignment,  if  he  judge  it  necessary. 

RKMAr.ICS  ON  THE  UKTREAT  BY  ALTKUXATE  BATTALIONS. 

702.  The  commander  of  each  line  will  endeavor  to 
maintain  the  necessary  harmony  between  its  battal- 
ions, notwithstanding  tlie  interval  between  them  ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  look  to  the  strict  execution  of  what 
is  prescribed  Nos.  G'J3  and  604. 

70o.  Uii  will  more  particularly  see  that  the  battal- 
ions, after  crossing  the  second  line,  direct  themselves 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  this  being  the  only 
means  by  which  the  interval  can  be  preserved  with 
sufficient  accuracy  to  enable  the  two  lines  to  reform 
into  one. 

704.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  the  odd  or 
even  battalions  of  the  second  line  will  face  about  at 
the  same  time  with  their  corresponding  ones  of  the  first 
line ;  they  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same  time 
with  them,  taking  care  to  preserve  their  proper  rela- 
tive positions  and  distances. 

IlEMAUiCS    ON    THE    MOVEMKNTS     OF    TIIR    AUTILLEUY    IN    RE- 
TREATING BY    ALTERNATE  BATTALIONS. 

705.  The  movement  of  the  battery  must  depend 
much  upon  the  state  of  the  action,  but  g(Mierally  it 
will  keep  abreast  with  the  line  nearest  the  enemy, 
and  take  such  position  as  will  most  effectively  cover 
the  retreat. 


127 


ssa^e 
if  the 
to  oc- 

ouble 
t  the 
tlie 
3  cor- 
ig  to 

»  gen- 
s  line 
tliere- 

iately 


ard. 
,  each 
Id: 


et»LUTltHt  Cf  4    Sfi.CA, 


aoQjciCc.^ 


I         ^ 


-^ lit *Js= 


Fa.! to. J t   if  U 
A'"   70  6. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   A    BRIGADE — PART   V.       127 

Article  XV. 

Passage  of  lines. 

TOG,  The  general,  wishing  to  execute  the  passage 
of  lines,  will  send  an  oi'der  to  the  commander  of  the 
second  line  to  place  it  in  the  position  it  ought  to  oc- 
cupy. 

707.  The  battalions  of  this  line  will  form  double 
columns,  closed  in  mass,  and  so  disposed  that  the 
centre  of  each  mass  may  be  opposite  to  the 
middle  of  the  interval  to  the  right  or  left  of  the  cor- 
responding battalion  of  the  first  line,  according  to 
the  order  given  by  the  general. 

708.  The  second  line  being  thus  disposed,  the  gen- 
eral will  send  an  order  to  the  commander  of  this  line 
to  execute  the  passage  of  lines,  and  give  notice  there- 
of to  the  commander  of  the  first  line. 

709.  The  chief  of  the  second  line  will  immediately 
command  : 

1.  Pass  the  line  in  front.     2.  Battalions^  forward. 

710.  These  commands  having  been  repeated,  each 
chief  of  battalion  will  command  :  Guide  centre. 

711.  The  commander  of  the  line  will  then  add  : 

3.  March  (or  douhle-quick — March). 

712.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  the  second  line  will 
advance ;  each  battalion  will  direct  itself  upon  the 
middle  of  the  corresponding  interval  in  the  first  line. 

713.  At  the  approach  of  the  second  line,  each  chief 
of  battalion  in  the  first  will  cause  the  right  and  left 
companies  of  his  battalion  to  be  ployed,  as  in  mass, 
behind  the  contiguous  companies,  in  time  not  to  ar- 
rest the  movement  of  the  battalions  of  the  second 
line. 


128        K VOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

*  714.  The  battalions  of  the  second  line  will  thus 
pKss  the  first ;  and  when  they  shall  have  cleared  it, 
the  commander  of  the  second  will  desifrnate  the  di- 
recting battalion.  Tliis  battalion  will  take  the  auide 
to  the  right,  and  the  subordinate  battalion  Avill  take 
the  guide  on  the  side  next  to  the  directing  batt;ilion. 
715.  The  battalions  liaving  arriA^ed  at  the  given 
position,  the  commander  of  the  line  will  cau.^e  them 
to  halt  and  to  deploy,  or  they  may  deploy  on  the 
march,  so  as  to  finish  their  deployment  at  the  re- 
quired place  of  halting. 

71G.  As  soon  as  tlie  second  line  has  passed  the 
first,  the  chiefs  of  battalion  of  the  latter  will  cause 
the  right  and  left  companies  of  their  respective  bat- 
talions to  return  into  line.  They  will  then  ploy  their 
respective  battalions,  either  in  simple  or  double  col- 
umn, as  the  general  may  direct,  and  take  their 
proper  positions  in  rear  of  the  corresponding  battal- 
ions of  the  second  line. 

REMARKS   ON  THE  DISPOSITION'  OF    THK     ARTILI-KHV    I\    THE 
PASSAGE  OK  LINKS. 

717.  If  the  second  line  passes  the  first  for  the  pur- 
pose of  relieving  the  latter,  the  battery  will  take 
a  favorable  position  to  cover  the  movement  and  fire 
with  the  greatest  rapidity,  without  changing  its  posi- 
tion while  the  movement  is  being  executed." 

718.  If  the  first  line  is  passed  for  the  purpose  of  an 
ofifensive  movement,  the  batteiy  will  take  a  position 
in  advance  of  the  line,  and  cover  the  movements  of 
the  troops. 

Articlk  XVI. 
Dispositions  against  cavalry. 

719.  iSIo  matter  what  tlie  number  of  battalions 
which  compose  a  column  or  line,  not  more  than  one 


1^9 

ires 

be 
ice. 

aise 

i  to 
will 


(so 
eft) 


'ont 
'ion, 
1  the 
the 
lejl 
the 
)  be 

ren- 


the 
will 

s  in 
tion 
ther 
Y  its 
iber 
di- 


1^ 


Mil       V 


Jiv'!'"^«;us9uPr 


B 


m 


nXXMJU)  JX.OLCe/6 


fori" 


ionon" 


ofthe''''" 


:]ii/'» 


,«a«/<"'*' 


onlonelof''''" 


i  March  (or  (/ouM*-***'"' 

124.  At  the  command  wrrl.tW  ?«'•''"  " 
column  n'liicli  is  to  form  tk  djwitia;'  ' 

stjodfast. 

fi'jJIUlie  other  echelotL*  r!!  in;  M" ; 
marfli  at  the  same  time,  eni  :u  n;' 
(tomtksiile  of  the  directir:  ••■'■-■"   • 
itmrclitothe  right  or  l-:-,     • 
mmkx  when  it  ha*  i3,(.-. 
cfpw  from  the  next  echelon:;:^,,. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE— PART    V.      1^0 

-vvlll  be  formed  into  the  same  square.  The  squares 
>\i!l  jreuerally  be  formed  by  echelons. 

720.  A  brigade  containing  four  battalions  will  be 
supposed  in  column,  by  company,  at  half  distance. 
The  general,  wishufg  to  form  square,  will  first  cause 
divisions  to  be  formed. 

721.  If  it  is  supposed  that  the  general  wishes  to 
form  echelons  on  one  of  the  centre  battalions,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Echelons  hy  hattalion  at  (so 
many)  paces.  S.  On  (such)  battalion  right  (or  /«?/?) 
in  fronts  form  echelons. 

722.  At  this,  the  colonel  of  each  battalion  in  front 
of  the  designated  one  will  either  command  :  Battalion^ 
rifjht  face,  or,  I.  Guide  left  ;  2.  Head  of  column  to  the 
rujht;  and  the  colonel  of  each  battalion  in  rear  of  the 
designated  one  will  either  command  :  Battalion^  left 

face,  or,  ].  Guide  right ;  2.  Head  of  column  to  the 
left,  as  the  general  may  have  previously  caused  to  be 
indicated. 

723.  These  dispositions  having  been  made,  the  gen- 
eral will  command : 

4.  March  (or  double-quick — March). 

724.  At  the  command  march,  the  portion  of  the 
column  which  is  to  form  the  directing  echelon  will 
stand  fast. 

725.  Alllhe  other  echelons  will  put  themselves  in 
march  at  the  same  time,  each  taking  its  direction 
from  the  side  of  the  directing  echelon;  and  whether 
it  march  to  the  right  or  left^  it  will  be  halted  by  its 
commander  when  it  has  taken  the  given  number 
of  paces  from  the  next  echelon  on  the  side  of  the  di- 
rection. 


IjfO      KYOLUTIONS    OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

72G.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement  the 
directing  echelon  will  form  square;  the  commander 
of  each  of  the  other  echelons,  after  haltini;  it,  will 
rectify  the  alignment  so  that  it  may  he  parallel  lo  the 
directing  echelon,  and  then  cauifc  i:  to  form  square. 

727.  If  the  colunm  is  at  full  instead  of  half-distance, 
the  general  will  first  ibrm  divisions,  and  then  close 
the  column  to  half-distance  on  any  designated  divis- 
ion, by  the  means  heretofore  indicated.  lie  will  then 
form  squar^by  echelon,  as  prescribed  above. 

728.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  general 
will  cause  it  to  take  company  distance  on  any  divis- 
ion he  may  designate,  by  the  means  heretofore  indi- 
cated. He  will  then  form  square  by  echelon,  as  pre- 
scribed above. 

729.  If  the  column  at  half-distance  is  so  immediately 
menaced  by  cavalry  that  there  Is  no  time  to  place  it 
in  echelon,  the  general  will  command: 

Form  sqiKwes. 

730.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
form  his  battalion  into  square  on  its  ground. 

7;U.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  is  so  suddenly 
threatened  by  cavaliy  as  not  to  allow  time  to  take 
distances,  it  will  be  formed  as  foljows.  The  general 
will  command  : 

Column  acjainsl  cavaJry. 

732.  This  having  been  repeated,  each  .colonel  will 
form  his  battalion  into  square  as  prescribed  in  the  S. 
B.,  No.  1,202  and  following. 

733.  Sc^uares  will  be  marched,  columns  will  be 
formed,  and  s(|uares  r(^duced,  b}'  the  connnands  and 
means  prescribed  in  the  .S'.  B.,  No.  1,049  and  folio w- 
in<r;  No.  l,OG0  and  following ;  No.  1,08G  and  follow- 


o  ' 


ing,  and  No.  1,20  7  and  following. 


Ui.3  EV«Luriofj:  or  A  Bf>/cAO£. 


^■ 


'> 


ffltfl 


CoU/JTLrv  oMourbst  CcvyaMru 


J{<^  '/31 


i 


.^OLUTlOr/SO^'^i-"     •-'-. 


TiTnrS 


S    11 


..  H 


11   £^ 


1                           •=^         O     0. 

u                              U 

\  ^       1 

^'  ?? 

;i 

l      i 

^3 
.S? 

'— ^  - -— • 

P    1 

*      0. 

J 

|]              1 

o 

y 

'■T 

"^ 

ff 

EVOLUTIONS   OF   A   BRIGADE — PART    V.      131 
To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

734.  The  square  from  line  of  battle  will  always  be 
formed  by  battalion,  and  disposed  in  echelon  if  there 
is  suflicicnt  time.  The  perpendicular  distance  be- 
tween the  echelons  will  be  such  that,  the  squares  be- 
ing formed,  the  first  front  of  the  second  may  find  itself 
at  least  fifty  paces  further  to  the  rear  than  the  fourth 
front  of  the  first  echelon.  This  rule  is  equally  appli- 
cable to  a  column  to  be  formed  into  squares. 

735.  When  the  echelons  have  to  march  in  advance 
or  in  retreat,  they  will  be  formed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  No.  650  and  following,  whether 
the  battalions  which  are  to  compose  the  echelons  be 
already  disposed  for  the  formation  of  squares,  or  be 
yet  deployed.  If  the  echelons  are  to  remain  at  a  halt, 
they  will  be  formed  on  the  centre,  or  on  one  of  the 
wings,  as  will  be  explained. 

736.  It  is  supposed  that  the  general  wishes  to  form 
the  echelons  on  the  centre,  he  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Echelons  hy  hattalioyi  at  ('so 
many)  paces.  3.  On  (such)  battalion^  right  (or  left) 
ici7if/  in  front,  form  echelons.  4.  March  Cor  c?ou&/e- 
quick — March). 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  portion  of  the 
line  which  is  to  form  the  directing  echelon  will  stand 
fast.  The  echelons  will  then  execute  what  is  pre- 
scribed Nos.  724  and  725. 

738.  If  the  general  should  Avish  the  echelons  to 
form  square,  as  if  formed  from  double  column,  it  will 
be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
in  the  S.  B.,  No.  1,103  and  following;  each  colonel 
taking  care  to  give  his  cautionary  commands  in  time, 
so  that  his  echelon  will  halt  in  its  proper  place. 

739.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  the  battalions 


132      EVOLUTIONS    OF^A    BRIGADK — PART    V. 

of  the  second  line  will  move  at  tlio,  same  time  with 
the  corresponding  ones  of  the  first  line,  <ind  form 
square  at  the  same  time.  Each  battalion  of  the  sec- 
ond line  Avill,  however,  before  forming  s({uare,  be 
moved  cither  to  the  right  or  left,  so  as  to  unmask  its 
corresponding  one  of  the  first  line. 

Oblique  squares. 

740.  A  line  threatened  by  cavalry,  and  without 
time  to  form  squares  disposed  in  echelon,  will  be 
formed  into  oblique  squares  by  battalion  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner  : 

The  general  will  command  : 

1.  Oblique  square  by  battalion.     2.   On  theji7'st  division, 
form  square. 

741.  At  the  second  command,  the  colonel  of  each 
battalion  will  immediately  form  his  battalion  into 
oblique  square  on  its  first  division,  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  S.  B.,  No.  1,1(5  7  and 
following. 

74  2.  The  formation  of  battalions  into  oblique 
squares,  on  the  left  division  of  each,  Avill  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

743.  In  the  preceding  example  the  line  was  sup- 
posed to  be  deployed  ;  but  if  it  be  formed  of  battal- 
ions already  in  columns  with  deploying  intervals,  the 
desired  obliquity  will  be  established  by  causing  each 
battalion  to  change  direction  by  the  tlank  ;  to  this 
end,  the  general  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  oNiqiie  squares  by  battalion.     2.   Change 
direction  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 


Vo/  3. 


£VOl(/r/C>MS  O/'A  Bf?/GAD£ 


PAIS 


CVOK/r^ifA/S 


S^fQAD£ 


4 


fitiVi'iV:  ^ 


■i  \ 


21'    746 


\ 


i^t:.^  i 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    BJllGADE — PART    V.        133 

744.  At  tlie  second  command,  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel of  each  battalion  will  trace  the  new  direction  as 
prescribed  in  the  6\  B.,  No.  1,175.  Pending  this 
operation,  each  colonel  will  give  the  commands  and 
make  the  preparatory  dispositions  for  a  change  of  di- 
rection by  the  llank,  and  cause  it  to  be  executed  as 
soon  as  the  new  direction  is  traced.  The  change  of 
direction  having  been  executed,  he  will  cause  the 
square  to  be  formed. 

745.  A  colunm  at  full  distance  may  be  formed  into 
oblique  squares  by  the  same  means  ;  each  battalion 
will  be  closed  to  half-distance  on  its  headmost  subdi- 
vision ;  which  being  executed,  the  battalion  will 
change  direction,  as  has  just  been  prescribed,  and 
then  ibrm  square. 

To  reform  the  line._ 

746.  The  line  being  disposed  in  oblique  squares, 
when  the  general  shall  wish  to  reform  it,  he  will 
cause  the  squares  to  break ;  to  this  end,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Reduce  squares. 

747.  At  this,  briskly  repeated,  each  colonel  will 
cause  his  square  to  break.  Pending  the  execution  of 
the  movement,  the  general  will  place  himself  in  front 
of  tlie  square  he  may  judge  the  most  conveniently 
situated  to  become  the  directing  battalion,  say  the 
third;  he  will  place  t^w3  markers  in  the  direction  he 
may  wish  to  give  to  the  line,  and  cause  it  to  be  pro- 
longed to  the  right  and  left,  by  the  means  prescribed 
Nor  291.  ^   . 

748.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  general 
will  conmiand  : 

1.  Form  line  of  battle  at  (such)  intervals.  2.  The 
third  the  battalion  of  direction.  3.  Mauch  (or 
double-quick— ^Imicu). 


131      EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    BRIGADE — PART    V. 

749.  At  the  second  command,  each  colonel  will 
give  the  corainauds  indicated  ^No.  421.  The  lieuten- 
ant-colonels -will  execute  Avhat  is  prescribed  No.  423. 

750.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No. 
422. 

751.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  general  will 
command  : 

4.  Guides — Posts. 

752.  If  the  formation  is  in  two  lines,  the  battalions 
of  the  second  line  will  form  oblique  squares  on  the 
positions  they  pccupy,  at  the  same  time  as  those  of 
the  lirst  line. 

REMARKS  OX   OBLIQUE  BQUAItES. 

753.  The  formation  of  a  line  into  oblique  squares 
gives  the  facility  of  placing  it,  whatever  be  its  extent, 
as  promptly  in  safety  against  the  attacks  of  the  cav- 
alry, as  if  it  were  a  single  battalion,  without  causing 
the  line  to  quit  the  position  it  occupies,  and  then, 
after  i-eforming  each  square  into  colmnn,  the  line 
may  be  marched  in  any  direction.  The  fires  of 
oblique  squares  also  cross  each  other  in  every  direc- 
tion, except  that  of  the  squares  themselves,  and  this 
even  when  the  battalions,  before  being  formed  into 
squares,  happened  not   to  be  on  the  same  alignment. 

REMAfiKS    ON    THE    DISPOSITION    8f    THE     ARTILLEUV    WITH 
THK  SQUARES. 

754.  If  a  cavalry  charge  it>  threatened,  the  battery 
will  take  up  such  positions  as  most  effectively  to  fire 
upon  the  enemy,  and  at  the  same  time  avoid  the  fire 
of  the  squares.  It  maybe  found  expedient  to  con- 
centrate all  the  pieces  near  the  interior  of  the 
angle    of  the    square  nearest  the  enemy ;    or    the 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    IJIIIGADE — PAKT    V..      135 

battery  may  be  divided  and  placed  near  the  interior 
angles  of"  the  two  squares  of  the  first  line,  or  between 
the  lines. 

755.  As  soon  as  the  pieces  arc  in  battery  the  ammu- 
nition pouches  will  be  filled,  and  the  limbers  and 
caissons  sent  to  the  rear  of  the  second  line. 

756.  If  the  gunners  are  driven  from  their  pieces, 
they  will  take  refuge  in  the  nearest  square.  As  soon 
as  the  charge  is  repulsed,  they  will  immediately  re- 
turn to  their  pieces  and  open  fire  upon  the  enemy. 


END  OF  EVOLUTIOXS  OF  A  BRIGADE. 


TITLE  VII. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  CORPS  D'ARMEE. 

General  principles  for  the  evolutions  of  a  corps  d'ar- 
mee. 

1.  The  evolutions  of  a  brij^ade  compreliendiiifij  all 
the  principles  and  details  of  the  movements  which 
should  be  made  by  a  single  brigade,  it  only  remains 
to  apply  these  principles  to  a  corps  crarmce. 

2.  In  this  instruction,  a  division  of  the  line  will  be 
supposed  to  consist  of  three  brigades,  and  in  every 
line  of  battle  composed  of  more  than  one  of  these  di- 
visions, they  will  be  posted  from  right  to  left  in  the 
order  of  their  numbers. 

3.  For  the  illustration  of  this  instruction,  a  corps 
rZ'a?-?«(3e,  consisting  of  nine  brigades,  will  be  supposed, 
but  the  rules  herein  prescribed  are  equally  applica- 
ble to  a  division  of  (he  line,  or  to  two  or  more  bri- 
gades. 

Posts  of  the  general-in-chief,  of  the  major-generals, 
and  brigadier-generals,  in  line  and  in  column. 

4.  In  line  of  battle  the  general  (that  is,  the  particu- 
lar general-in-chief)  will  have  no  fixed  position  ;  he 
will  go  wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  neces- 
sary. 

5.  In  column,  he  will  hold  himself  habitually  at  its 
head,  in  order  to  direct  it  according  to  his  views. 

G.  In  the  evolutions,  he  will  })lace  himself  at  the 
point  Avhence  he  can  best  direct  the  general  execu- 
tion of  the  movement. 


tVULUTIONS      OF  A       COnPS      O    *RMk 


«^ 


tfffifi 


ffltflffi 


i'i'i'iViVm 


ftTftuIi 


iVl'i'l'l'l'l'l 


Line,  of  bailie- ifbiwo  Imn/S  of  a-  oorjvi  oLarmt^ 
X."  .3 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   A   CORPS    D'aRMEE.  137 

7.  In  all  cases  the  general  may  repair  wherever  he 
may  judge  his  presence  necessary,  taking  care  to 
leave  in  his  habitual  position  the  next  in  command, 
or  the  chief  of  his  stalf,  charged  with  the  execution  of 
his  orders. 

8.  In  line  of  battle,  major-generals  (generals  of  di- 
vision) will  place  themselves  at  about  one  hundred 
and  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions. 

9.  In  coljimn,  they  will  hold  themselves  on  the  di- 
recting flank,  abreast  with  the  centres  of  their  divis- 
ions, and  at  sixty  paces  from  the  guides. 

10.  Brigadier-generals  (generals  of  brigade)  will 
place  themselves  as  prescribed  in  the  E.  J5.,  Nos.  3 
and  4. 

11.  Major-generals  will  look  to  the  exact  and 
regular  execution  and  transmission  of  all  signals  or 
notifications  from  the  general,  and  commands  or  in- 
structions given  by  themselves  pursuant  thereto  ;  ac- 
cordingly, they  may  repair  wherever  they  may  judge 
their  presence  necessary,  within  the  extent  of  their 
divisions. 

12.  Brigadier-generals  will  look  to  the  exact  and 
regular  execution  of  all  signals,  notifications,  or  com- 
mands coming  from  their  major-generals,  and  to  all 
commands  given  by  themselves  pursuant  thereto ;  ac 
cordingly,  they  may  repair  wherever  they  may  deem 
their  presence  necessary,  within  the  extent  of  their 
brigades. 

General  rules  for  commands. 

13.  In  corps  d'armee^  the  evolutions  and  move- 
ments will  be  executed  by  means  of  signals,  bugle 
sounds,  and  commands. 

14.  When  the  general  shall  wish  a  movement  to  be 
executed,  he  will  send  staff  officers  to  notify  the  gen- 
erals of  division  of  the  nature  of  the  movement,  or 
he  may  make  use  of  telegraphic  signals  to  the  same 

11 


138  K VOLUTIONS   OF    A   CORPS   D'ARMEE. 

end.  Each  major-general  will  then,  by  staff  officers, 
immediately  notify  the  briiradier-generals  of  his  com- 
mand of  the  movement  to  be  made. 

15.  The  general  will  then  cause  the  attention  to  be 
sounded,  which  will  be  briskly  repeated  by  the  bu- 
glers of  the  major-generals,  and  at  which  the  generals 
of  brigade  will  each  immediately  give,  by  word  of 
mouth,  the  general  commands  relating  to  the  ma- 
noeuvre, and  applicable  to  his  brigade. 

16.  The  final  command,  or  that  which  determines 
the  execution  of  the  general  movement,  Avill  always 
be  given  by  the  general,  who  to  that  end  will  cause 
the  signal  of  execution  to  be  sounded,  which  signal 
will  be  briskly  repeated  by  the  bugles  of  the  major- 
generals. 

17.  The  command  of  execution,  signified  by  the 
sound,  will  be  immediately  given  by  the  generals  of 
brigade,  and  briskly  repeated  by  the  colonels,  and,  if 
necessary,  by  the  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors,  as* 
prescribed  in  the  E.  ZJ.,  No.  12. 

18.  In  case  the  generals  of  division  or  brigade  have 
not  been  notified  of  a  movement  previous  to  the  sig- 
nal of  attention,  the  signal  of  execution  which  follows 
will  indicate  that  the  command  is  to  advance  to  the 
front  in  the  then  order  of  formation.  The  generals 
of  brigade  will  give  the  preparatory  command  for 
forward,  immediately  after  the  signal  of  attention,  and 
at  the  signal  of  execution  they  will  command  inarch. 

19.  If  during  the  march  the  general  should  wish  to 
halt  his  command  without  having  previously  notified 
the  generals  of  division,  he  will  cause  the  signal  of 
execution  only  to  be  sounded,  at  which  the  generals 
of  brigade  will  immediately  halt  their  brigades.  This 
rule  is  f/ene^-al. 

'  20.  When  a  line  has  to  execute  a  central  move- 
ment, the  general  will  repair  to  the  position  which  he 
may  have  selected   as  the  point  (Tappui,  and  inform 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    CORPS    n'ARAIEE.  139 

tbc  ijencrals  of  division  of  the  manoeuvre,  as  prescrib- 
ed No.  14. 

21,  In  column,  commands  will  be  extended  by  repe- 
tition, according  to  the  same  principles. 

22.  As  often  as  a  line  breaks  into  several  columns, 
the  senior  general  officer  or  colonel  in  each  will  dis- 
charge the  duties  attributed  above  to  the  general,  or 
general-in-chief ;  but  commands  will  not  be  given  by- 
signals  or  bugle  sound,  unless  the  column  consists  of 
more  than  one  brijjade. 


140  EVOLUTIONS   OF   A   CORPS    D'ARMEE. 

PART  FIRST. 

Article  I. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

Article  II. 

Loading  at  will  and  the  firings. 

Article  III. 

To  cause  the  line  to  rest. 

23.  The  general  wishing  the  movements  prescribed 
by  the  above  articles  to  be  executed,  will  cause  the 
generals  of  division  to  be  informed  of  his  intention, 
Avho  will,  in  turn,  notify  their  generals  of  brigade. 
The  general  will  then  cause  the  signal  of  attention  to 
be  sounded,  at  which  each  general  of  brigade  will  give 
the  preparatory  commands  appropriate  for  the  move- 
ment, as  prescribed  in  the  E.  B. 

24.  The  general  will  then  cause  the  signal  of  exe- 
cution to  be  sounded,  when  the  generals  of  brigade 
will  give  the  command  which  the  signal  indicates,  and 
cause  it  to  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  E.  B. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF   A    CORPS   D'ARMEE.  141 


PART  SECOND. 

DIFFERENT  MODES  OF  PASSING  FKOM  THE 
.  ORDER  IN  BATTLE  TO  THE  ORDER  IN  COL- 
UMN. 

Article  I. 
To  break  to  the  front,  to  the  right  or  left  into  column. 

25.  The  movements  prescribed  by  the  above-named 
article  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

26.  In  breaking  to  the  right  (or  left),  to  march  to 
the  left  (or  right),  each  general  of  brigade  after  the 
leading  one  will  take  care  to  move  his  brigade  so 
that  there  shall  be  between  the  leading  subdivision  of 
his  headmost  battalion  and  the  rearmost  subdivision  in 
the  preceding  brigade  the  distance  of  a  subdivision 
andone  hundred  and  fifty  paces,  in  case  the  battery 
of  his  brigade  moves  in  its  rear. 

27.  When  the  column  is  at  full  distance,  and  the 
brigade  batteries  move  within  the  columns  of  their  re- 
spective brigades,  in  rear  of  the  leading  or  three  lead- 
ing battalions,  the  distance  between  the  leading  sub- 
division of  one  brigade  and  the  rearmost  subdivision 
of  the  one  preceding  will  be  the  length  of  a  subdivis- 
ion and  fifty  paces,  if  the  column  be  formed  by  com- 
pany, and  a  subdivision  and  ninety  paces  if  the  column 
be  by  division. 

28.  These  distances  in  column  between  the  brigades 
will  result  from  the  leading  or  three  leading  battalions 
having  moved  forward  to  admit  the  battery,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  E.  B.,  No.  216. 


142  KVOLUTIONS    or    A    COUPS    D'AUMKE. 

Article  II. 
To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  into  column. 

29.  The  line  will  be  broken  to  the  rear  according 
to  the  principles  indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

Article  III. 

To  ploy  the  line  into  column  or  in  mass. 

30.  The  general  wishing  to  ploy  the  line,  will  cause 
the  movement  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  Nos.  2.5  and  24.  Each  general  of 
brigade,  at  the  signal  of  attention^  will  give  the  neces- 
sary preparatory  commands  for  ploying  in  a  proper 
manner  his  brigade  as  if  by  itself. 

31.  At  the  signal  of  execution^  the  ployments  in  each 
brigade  will  commence,  and  be  executed  simultane- 
ously, and  as  soon  as  each  bi'igadier  has  finished  the 
ployment  of  his  brigade  he  will  conduct  it- by  the 
shortest  route  to  its  proper  position  in  the  general 
column. 

.'52.  To  this  end,  those  brigade  columns  whose 
places  in  the  general  column  are  in  rear  of  the  bri- 
gade of  formation,  may  respectively  be  faced  by  the 
rear  rank  before  commencing  the  march  for  positions 
in  that  cohmm. 

33.  If  the  brigade  batteries  are  not  in  their  respec- 
tive columns,  the  distance  between  the  leading  subdi- 
vision of  one  brigade  and  the  rearmost  subdivision  of 
the  brigade  just  in  front  of  it  will  be  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces,  whether  the  column  be  by  company, 
or  division,  at  half-distance,  or  closed  in  mass. 

34.  If,  however,  the  batteries  are  in  the  columns, 
the  distance  between  the  leading  subdivision  of  one 
brigade  and  the  rearmost  subdivision  of  the  preced- 
ing brigade  will  be  fifty  paces  if  the  column  is  by 


V"/-    3                                                      £.VOl(/T/0//S     or  A     COffPS   O' ARMi£ 

/>, 

Ml 

im 

ma 

—     0'  _ 

='             m  % 

m    ^. 

^                                             __       «_.   X _ 

::E.:-r.^: 

-^-^  am                                               --A.^  est             =^      '^^, 

==                       >K                ""^H< 

^r::.:.-.,,,                  ■»  "."r.^_                              V^""---.                    V:::::: .                  ^^  ^~:: 

~^i  ..-:-.: 

---■■       -^.^           ;::=r=                                   -."      --^            .::=:.__ 

-'■--' 

TfiiiaiM  "~^--,^                                ^tiijitti  ""^~^..                                -mm 

mt^r\           —                           iffiin]            -^ 

-- ^*.___ 

— -> — _ 

« 

Plo^nuTa  oF  a,  Una,  of  thrtu  iricfd.dM^iKiy/o  Imtt,                                        ^ 

mlo  CO Izc-nrv,  wi  l?i&  r%gTib  oFlht  s^cortoL  Iri^xait. 

N°   30. 

EVOLUTIONS  'of    A    CORPS    d'ARMEE.         143 

company,  and  ninety  paces  if  the  column  is  by  divis- 
ion, and  this  whether  tlie  column  be  at  half-distance 
or  closed  in  mass. 

35.  The  major-generals  ■will  send  staff  oflicers  in 
time  to  mark  the  distance  which  should  separate  the 
briaades  of  their  divisions  when  in  column. 


PART  THIRD. 

Article  I. 

To  inarch  in  column  at  full  distance. 

Article  11. 

Column  in  route. 

Article  III. 

To  change  direction  in  colum.n  at  full  distance. 

Article  IV. 

To  halt  the  column,  and  to  align  it. 

36.  The  movements  prescribed  in  the  above-named 
articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  21. 

37.  If,  in  column  in  route,  the  pieces  of  the  batter- 
ies are  not  able,  owing  to  the  narrowness  of  the  way, 
to  march  four  abreast,  the  distance  heretofore  pre- 
scribed between  brigades  in  column  at  full  distance 
will  not  be  sufficient  for  the  battery.  A  proper  inter- 
val, however,  for  each  battery  must  be  obtained,  and 
•when  the  cadenced  step  is  resumed  each  battery  will 
form  as  prescribed  in  the  E.  B.,  No.  215,  and  the 


144  KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    COKTS    d'aKMKE. 

brip:a(los  will  close  up  to  their  proper  distances  asf)rc- 
scribcd  No.  26. 

Article  V.. 

To  close  to  half-distance  or  in  mass. 

Isi.    To  close  the  colnnm  on  (he  lendimj  nuhdin'sinit, 
2d.    To  close  the  column  on  the  rearmost  siibdi vision. 
~'dd.    To  close  the  column  on  an  interior  brigade. 

38.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  E.  B.,  and  by  the 
means  indicated  Nos.  23  and  24.  The  proper  dis- 
tances to  be  taken  between  brigades  are  prescribed 
Nos.  33  and  34. 

39.  If  necessary,  the  generals  of  brigade,  at  the  sig- 
nal of  alteniion,  will,  with  reference  to  their  batteries, 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  E.  B.y  No  145. 

Article  VI. 

To  march  in  column  at  half-distance,   or  closed  in 
mass. 

Article  VII. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  half-distance. 

Article  VIII. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 

^st.  In  mctrchinq. 
2d.  From  a  halt. 

40.  The  movements  prescribed  by  the  above-named 
articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    CORPS    D'ARMEE.         145 

4L  In  changing  direction  from  a  halt,  each  brigade 
after  the  leading  one  Avill  change  direction  by 
wheeling  by  its  head  out  of  the  general  column,  and 
by  being  conducted  by  its  brigadier-general  to  its 
new  position  in  column. 

Article  IX. 

Being  in  column  at  half-distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to 
take  distances. 

Inf.    To  fal-e  distances  hi/  the  head  of  the  column. 
2d.    To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 
'Sd.    To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  cuhunn. 
4:th.  To  take  distances  on  an  interior  column. 

42.  The  movements  prescribed  by  the  above- 
named  articles  Avill  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

43.  Prior  to  executing  either  of  these  movements, 
however,  the  general  will  cause  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  E.  B.,  No.  198,  to  be  executed  by  each  brigade 
of  the  column.  After  the  distances  are  taken  the 
batteries  will  be  ordered  into  the  column  by  their 
respective  generals  of  brigade,  the  colonels  of  the 
battalions  having  had  care  to  leave  for  the  batteries 
the  proper  intervals. 

Article  X. 

Countermarch. 

Article  XI. 

Being  in  column  by  company,  to  forfn  divisions. 

44.  The  movements  prescribed  by  the  above- 
named  articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 


146         EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    CORPS    D'ARMKE. 


PART  FOURTH. 

DIFFEBENT  MODES  OP  PASSING  FROM  THE 
ORDEK  IN  COLUMN  TO  THE  ORDER  IN  BAT- 
TLE. 

Article  I. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

45.  The  different  modes  of  determining  the  line  of 
l)attle  have  been  explained  in  the  E.  B. 

Article  II. 

Mode  of  passing  from  cokimn  at  full  distance  into  line 
of  battle. 

To  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle. 

Article  III. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half-dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.   To  the  left  (or  right),       ') 

2    On  the  right  {or  left),        ^.^^^  Une  of  battle. 

3.  Forward  bg  deployment,  ^ 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,  J 

Article  IV. 

Column  closed  in  mass,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

Article   V. 

Formation  into  line  of  battle  composed  of  two  move- 
ments. 


V»/.    3                                                               ^/.     2  9 

...         ^..._.      .                    K 

* 

*_                  \=r=-^ 

_% 

-'■  ■ 



1 — 

rjiir 

Cohxm,Tb  of  throe  hv^ouoifs  r(, 

^arwaord.  vrvta  Zvr^  a/  htn^ttU 

^=^ 

ftrsl   iri^oLdf..     ■            /.y.'' 

r_ 

• 

T— — • 

EVOLUTIONS    OP    A    CORPS    d'ARMEE.         14  7 

46.  All  the  movements  prescribed  b}-  the  above- 
named  articles  will  be  executed  accordintr  to  the 
principles  presciibed  in  the  E.  B.,  and  by  the  means 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24,  the  general  having  first  de- 
termined the  line  of  battle.  * 

47.  In  the  formation  forward,  or  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line  of  battle,  each  brigade,  other  than  the  one 
of  formation,  will  break  by  its  head  from  the  general 
column,  and  be  conducted  so  that  its  leading  battal- 
ion shall  occupy  its  proper  place  in  line.  The 
brigadier-general  will  then  deploy  his  brigade  on  the 
line  as  recpiired. 

48.  In  the  successive  formations  in  line,  the  gener- 
al will  send  a  statT  officer  to  mark  the  point  where 
the  flank  of  each  brigade  which  is  nearest  the  one  of 
formation  ought  to  rest.  This  ride  is  general^  whether 
the  battalions  are  to  he  deployed  or  remain  in  mass. 

r.EMARKS  ON  THE  FORMATIOX  IX  MNE. 

49.  Habitually,  the  brigades  will  be  formed  on  the 
line  of  battle  in  their  proper  order,  viz  :  Jirst,  second, 
th  ird,  fo u rth ,  ffth ,  etc. 

50.  If,  however,  the  general. should  deem  it  expe- 
dient to  form  line  at  once  on  the  head  of  the  column, 
and  at  the  same  time  it  is  necessary  to  prolong  the 
line  both  to  the  right  and  left,  he  may  direct  the 
brigades  to  be  formed  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
point  d'appuij  without  regard  to  the  order  of  their 
numbers. 

51.  In  this  case,  the  brigades  composing  the  divis- 
ions of  the  line  being  separated,  the  major-generals 
will  be  assigned  commands  temporarily  by  the  gen- 
eral. 


lib         KVOLUTIONS    OF    A    COKPS    d'AUMEE. 

Articlk  VI. 
COLUMNS    CLOSED    IN   MASS. 
^  Deployment  by  battalion  in  mass. 

52.  A  column  in  mass,  whatever  the  number  of 
brigades,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  by  de- 
ployment. 

l.sL  Faced  to  the  front. 

2d.  Faced  to  the  rear. 

3d.  Faced  to  the  left. 

4lh.  Faced  to  the  right. 

5th.  Oblique  to  the  front,  or  rear. 

53.  The  general  having  determined  the  line  of 
battle,  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  above-named 
article  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  21. 

54.  In  the  formations  faced  to  the  front  or  rear^ 
each  brigade,  other  than  the  one  of  formation,  will 
break  from  the  general  column,  as  prescribed  No.  47, 
and  when  the  leading  battalion  has  arrived  on  the 
line  the  brigadier-general  will  complete  its  deploy- 
ment. 

55.  In  a  line  of  battalions  in  mass,  the  distances  be- 
tween tTie  brigades  will  habitually,  in  presence  of  the 
enemy,  be  such  as  to  afford  space  for  each  brigade  to 
deploy  its  masses,  and  to  leave  the  distance  of  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  between  the  flanks  of  the 
brigades. 

56.  If  the  line  of  masses  constitute  a  part  of  the 
reserve,  or  other  circumstances  should  render  it  ex- 
pedient, the  distances  in  line  between  the  brigades 
can  be  reduced  to  fifty  paces. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    A    CORPS    D'ARMEE.         149 

Movements  which  may  be  executed  by  a  line  of  bat- 
talions in  mass. 

1«^    To  advance  in  line. 

2d.    To  halt  the  line  marcliiny  in  advance,  and  to  alif/n  it. 

3rf.  The  line  marching  in  advance,  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction. 

Ath.    To  march  the  line  in  retreat. 

5th.    To  chauge  direction  of  the  line  inarching  in  retreat. 

6th.  To  break  the  line  formed  hj  battalion  in  mass  into 
column. 

Ith.   To  ploy  the  line  of  masses  into  column. 

Sth.  To  tale  deploying  intervals  from  a  line  formed  by 
battalion  in  mass. 

57.  The  movements  above  prescribed  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  indicated  Nos.  23 
and  24. 

58.  In  ploying  a  line  of  masses  into  column,  each 
brigade  will  ploy  as  if  by  itself,  and  it  will  then  be 
conducted  into  the  general  column  as  indicated  No. 
31. 

nEMARKS  OX  INVEUSIOxV. 

59.  The  principles  prescribed  in  the  E.  B.,  No. 
426  and  following,  for  breakhg  or  ploying  into  column 
a  single  brigade,  are  applicable  to  a  line  of  many 
brigades. 


PART  FIFTH. 

Article  I. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle  deployed. 

Article  II. 

To  halt  the  line,  and  to  align  it. 


150         EVOLUTIONS   OF   A    COUPS    D'ARMEE. 

Article  III. 
Change  of  direction,  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

Article  IV. 
To  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 

Article  V. 
To  halt  the  line  marching  in  retr^^at,  and  to  align  it. 

Artici-e  VI. 
Change  of  direction  marching  in  retreat. 


Article  VII. 

March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  brigades  formed 
in  battalion  columns. 

1st.    To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  adoance. 

2d.   To  halt  the  Hue  of  columns,  and  to  deploy  it. 

'dd.  The  line  of  columns  marchivcj  in  advance,  to  cause  it 
to  chanrje  direction. 

4th.    To  cause  line  of  columns  to  march  in  retreat. 

5th.  To  halt  the  line  of  columns  marching  in  retreat,  and 
to  align  it. 

Qth.  The  line  of  columns  marching  in  rctrcttt,  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction, 

7th.   To  close  the  intervals  of  (t  line  of  columns. 


Article  VIII. 
March  in  line  of  battle  by  the  flank  of  companies. 


EVOLUTIONS   OF    A    CORPS   D  ARMEE.         151 

Article  IX. 
March  in  line  of  battle  formed  in  division  columns. 

60.  The  movements  prescribed  in  Jbe  above-named 
articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

61.  In  the  alignment  of  deployed  lines,  the  briga- 
dier-general of  that  brigade  on  which  the  alignment 
is  made  will  not  order  his  colors  to  their  posts  until 
the  alignment  is  completed.  The  general  will  cause 
him  to  be  notified  of  this  fact. 

62.  In  closing  intervals,  the  general  will  cause  the 
major-generals  to  be  notified  of  the  distance  which 
should  separate  the  brigades. 

Article  X, 
To  pass  the  defile  in  front. 

Article  XL 
To  pass  the  defile  in  rear. 

63.  The  movements  prescribed  by  the  above-named 
articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

74.  In  passing  to  the  front,  should  the  defile  be  op- 
posite the  interval  between  two  brigades,  all  the  sub- 
divisions will  wheel  to  the  left  or  right,  whether  by 
platoon  or  company. 

Article  XIL 
Changes  of  front. 


152         EVOLUTION'S    OF    A    CORPS    D'aRMEK. 

Perpendicular  changes  of  front. 

l«^    Chavgen  of  front  furicard. 
2(1.    Chaiifjes  of  front  to  the  rear. 
Zd.   Central  changes  affront. 

Oblique  changes  of  front. 
Article  XIII. 

ORDER  TN  ECHELON. 

Direct  echelons  in  advancing. 

Direct  echelons  in  retreat. 

Oblique  echelons. 

Article  XIV. 

To  retreat  by  alternate  battalions. 

To  reform  the  line. 

Article  XV. 
Passage  of  line. 

Article  XVI. 

Dispositions  against  cavalry. 

Oblique  squares. 

To  reform  the  line. 

65.  The  movements  prescribed  in  the  above-named 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   A    CORPS    D'ARMEE.         153 

articles  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
indicated  Nos.  23  and  24. 

66.  In  retreating  by  alternate  battalions,  or  in  the 
passage  of  lines,  the  general  of  each  line  will  cause 
the  signal  of  execution  to  be  sounded  for  the  move- 
ment of  his  line..  * 

67.  In  the  passage  of  lines,  if  the  general  should  not 
wish  to  pass  the  whole  line  at  once,  it  will  be  executed 
by  the  second  line  of  each  brigade  passing  one  at  a 
time. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  FORMATION  ON  THE  INFANTRY  OP  THE  RE- 
SERVE. 

68.  When  ii\  line,  the  infantry  of  the  reserve  should 
most  generally  be  drawn  up  in  close  order,  with  the 
interval  of  twenty-two  paces  between  the  battalions 
in  mass.  In  column,  the  distance  between  the  bri- 
gades may  be  reduced  to  fifty  paces. 

Constitution  of  the  reserve. 

69.  In  a  corps  d'armee,  the  artillery  of  the  reserve 
should  be  equal  to  one-half  the  artillery  of  the  line  of 
battle. 

70.  The  infantry  of  the  reserve  will  be  such  part 
of  the  whole  body  as  the  general  may  think  expedi- 
ent; generally,  however,  it  will  be  one-third. 

7 1 .  The  reserve  will  be  under  the  especial  direction 
of  the  general-in-chief. 

72.  The  special  corps,  including  sappers,  miners, 
pontoniers,  etc.,  will  be  attached  to  the  reserves,  un- 
less their  services  are  otherwise  needed. 

73.  The  general  may  mass  the  whole  or  a  portion 
of  the  brigade  batteries  and  cavalry  forces,  at  one  or 
several  points  on  the  field,  as  the  state  of  the  action, 
or  his  own  judgment,  may  suggest. 

FINIS. 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 


TITLE  VI. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  BRIGADE. 

PAGE. 

General  priuciples  for  the  evolutions  of  a  brigade  (No.  1) 5 

Posts  of  the  brigadier-general  in  line  and  in  column  (No.  3) 5 

General  rules  for  commands  (No.  7) 6 

Position  of  tlie  brigade  battery  (No.  17) 7 

Position  of  the  cavalry  of  the  brigade  (No.  20) 8 

PART  FIRST. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  to  close  ranks  (No,  21) 9 

Article  II. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  25) 9 

Article  III.— Loading  at  will  and  the  firings  (No.  26).  Re- 
marks on  firing  (No.  45).  To  rest  (No.  48).  -  To  stack  arms 
(No.  52) 9 

PART  SECOND. 

Article  I. — To  break  to  the  front,  to  the  right,  or  left  into  col- 
umn (No.  58).  To  break  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left  (No. 
63).    Remarks  (No.  67) 14 

Article  II.— To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  into  col- 
umn (No.  68) 15 

Artiole  III. — To  ploy  the  line  into  close  column  or  in  mass,  in 
rear  of  first  division,  first  battalion  (No.  72).  To  ploy  the  line 
in  rear  or  front  of  last  division,  fourth  battalion  (No.  86).  To 
ploy  the  line  on  first  or  last  division  of  an  interior  battalion 
(No.  88).  Remarks  on  ploying  a  line  into  a  column  closed  in 
mass  (No.  93) 16 

PART  THIRD. 

Article  I. — To  march  in  column  at  full  distance  (No.  95) 22 

Article  IT.— Column  in  route  (No.  103).  Remarks  (No.  108)...  23 
Article  III. — To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance 

(No.  109) 24 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  112).    Remarks  (No. 

119) 25 


156  COXTKXTS. 

Article  V. — To  close  the  column  or  the  leading  company  to 
half-distance  or  in  mass  (No.  121).  To  close  the  column  on 
the  roarmoHt  company  (No.  12<J).  To  close  the  column  ou  an 
interior  battalion  (No.  ll<9).     Remarks  ,' No.  143) 26 

Article  VI. —  I'o  march  in  column  at  half-distnnce  or  closed  in 
mass  (No.  140) 30 

Article  VII. — To  change  direction  in  column  at  half-distance 
(No.  150) 31 

Article  VIII. — To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass 
in  marching  (No.  151).  To  change  a  direction  fronra  halt 
(No.  155) 31 

Article  IX- — Uciiig  in  column  at  half-distance  or  closed  in 
mass,  to  take  distances  by  th;>,  head  of  column  (No.  1(32).  To 
take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column  (No.  160).  To  take 
distances  on  the  head  of  the  column  (No.  178).  To  take  dis- 
tances on  an  interior  battaion  (No.  189).  Kemarka  on  taking 
distances  (No.  19S) 33 

Article  X. — Countermarch  at  full  or  half-distance  (No.  199). 
Countermarch  of  a  column  closed  in  mass  (No.  204) 39 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  corapanj-,  to  form  divisions 
(No.  208).  Same  on  a  march  (No.  214).  Uemarks  on  the  posi- 
tion of  the  battery  in  the  column  (No.  215.)  rosition  of  the 
cavalry  (No.  218) 40 

PART  FOURTH. 

Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle  (No.  219).    42 

Article  II. — Mode  of  passing  from  column  at  full  distance  into 
line  of  battle  (No.  220).  By  inversion  to  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  battle  (No.  225).     Successive  formations  (No.  232) 42 

Article  III. — Column  at  half-distance  to  the  left  or  right  into 
line  of  battle  (No.  237).  Column  at  half-distance  on  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  240).  Column  at  half-distance 
forward  into  line  of  battle  (No.  254),  Remarks  on  forming 
forward  into  line  of  battle  (No.  2t5.i).  Column  at  half-distance 
faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  (No.  271).  To  form  Into 
line  faced  to  the  rear  without  halting  (No.  281) 45 

Articlk  IV. — Column  closed  in  mass  forward  into  lino  of  battle 
or  inio  line  faced  to  the  roar  (No.  282) 63 

Article  V. — Formations  into  line  of  battle  composed  of  two 
movements  (No.  283)....! 53 

Article  VI.— Deployment  by  battalions  in  mass  (No.  288).  To 
deploy  by  battalion  in  mass,  faced  to  the  front,  on  first  battal- 
ion (No.  289).  Same  movement  without  halting  (No.  303). 
To  deploy  in  mass  on  fourth  battalion  (.\o.  301).  Line  of 
battle  on  third,  to  deploy  in  mass  on  third  battalion  (No.  316) 
Line  of  battle  on  third  to  deploy  in  mass  on  the  second  bat- 
talion (No.  322).  To  deploy  battalions  in  mass  faced  to  the 
rear  (No.  330).  To  deploy  battalions  in  mass  faced  to  the  left 
(No.  831).  To  deploy  by  battalions  in  mass  faced  to  the  right 
(No.  338).  To  deploy  by  inversion  faced  to  the  right  (.No.  3-39). 
To  deploy  by  battalions  in  mass,  oblique  to  the  front  or  rear 


CONTEXTS.  157 

(No.  344).  T^emarks  on  the  movements  of  the  battalions  of 
the  second  line  (No.  347).  Kcmarks  on  the  disposition  of  the 
brigade  battery  in  formations  from  column  into  line  (No.  348). 
To  advance  in  lino  of  battalions  in  mass  (No.  350).  To  halt  a 
line  of  battalions  in  mass,  marching  in  advance,  and  to  align 
it  (No.  362).  The  line  marching  in  advance,  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction  (No.  367).  Remarks  (No.  378).  To  march 
the  line  in  retreat  (No.  379).  To  change  direction  of  tlie  lino 
marching  in  retreat  (No.  3S8).  To  break  the  line  formed  by 
battalion  in  mass  into  column  (No.  394).  To  ploy  the  line  of 
masses  into  column  (No  399).  The  same  movement  in  niarch- 
ing(No.  409).  Hemarks  on  forming  h  column  closed  in  mass 
from  a  line  of  battalions  in  mass  (No.  410).  To  takedeploying 
intervals  from  a  line  formed  by  battalions  in  mass  (No.  ill). 
To  take  deploying  intervals  forward  either  parallel  or  oblique 
(No.  418).  Remarks  on  disposition  of  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers in  a  line  of  battalions  in  mass  (No.  425).  Remarks  on  in- 
versions (No.  426) 54 

PART  FIFTH. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle  deployed  (No.  430). 
General  remarks  on  the  march  in  line  of  battle  ( No.  457) 79 

Article  II. — To  halt  the  line,  and  to  align  it  (No.  46:3) 84 

Article  TII — Change  of  direction  marching  in  line  of  battle 
(No.  474K  Remarks  on  changes  of  direction  marching  in  line 
of  battle  (No.  488; 86 

Article  IV.— To  retreat  in  line  of  battle  (No.  490) 89 

Article  V. — To  halt  the  line  marching  in  retreat,  and  to  align 
it  (No.  496) 90 

Article  IV. — Change  of  direction  marching  in  retreat  (No.  498)    90 

Article  VII. — March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  battalions  in 
columns  (No.  507).  To  cause  the  line  of  columns  to  advance 
(.No.  514).  Remarks  on  the  march  of  a  line  of  battalion  col- 
umns with  deploying  intervals  (No.  534).  To  halt  the  line  of 
columns,  and  to  deploy  it  ( No.  538).  The  line  of  columns  march- 
ing in  advance,  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  (No.  546).  To 
cause  the  line  of  columns  to  march  in  retreat  (No.  6.54\  To 
halt  the  line  of  columns  marching  in  retreat,  and  to  align  it 
(No.  558).  The  line  of  columns  marching  in  retreat,  to  cause 
it  to  change  direction  (No. 560).  To  close  the  intervals  of  a 
line  of  columns  (No.  565) 92 

Article  VIII. — March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  deployed 
battalions  by  the  flanks  of  companies  (No.  673) 102 

Article  IX. — March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  battalions 
formed  in  division  columns  (No.  575).  Remarks  on  the  dis-. 
position  of  the  artillery  with  linos  of  battle  i  No.  577) 103 

Article  X. — To  i)as8  a  defile  in  front  (No.  57.8).  Remarks  on 
the  passage  of  defiles  in  advancing  (No.  595).  K«marks  on  the 
disposition  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers  in  passing  a  defile 
to  the  front  (No.  000).  Remarks  on  the  passage  of  the  defile 
in  front  by  the  second  line  (No.  602) 103 


158  CONTENTS. 

AiiTiCLK  XI. — To  pass  ii  dcfilo  in  rctront  (No.  CC3).  Remarks 
on  tho  disposition  of  the  skirmishers  in  passing  the  dcfilo  in 
retreat  (No.  615).  Kemarks  on  the  passing  of  the  defile  in  re- 
treat by  the  second  line  (No.  G16).  Keniarks  on  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  artillery  in  passing  defile  in  front  or  in  retreat 
(No.  617). 108 

Article  XII. — Perpendicular  change  of  front  forward  (No.  619). 
Change  of  front  to  the  rear  (No.  6'2it).  Central  changes  of 
front  (No.  037).  01)Iiiiue  changes  of  front  (No.  044).  Remark 
on  changes  ol  front  (No.  047).  Changes  of  front  of  two  lines 
(No.  048) 112 

Article  XIII. — Order  in  echelon  (No.  649).  Direct  echelons 
in  advancing  (No.  65fl).  Direct  echelons  in  retreat  (No.  663). 
Oblique  echelons  (No.  071).  Remarks  on  the  order  in  echelons 
(No,  682) 117 

Aeticlk  XIV. — To  retreat  by  alternate  battalions  (No.  688).  To 
reform  the  line  (No.  700).  Remarks  on  the  retreat  by  alter- 
nate battalions  (No  702).  Remarks  on  the  movements  of  the 
artillery  in  retreating  by  alternate  battalions  (No.  705) 123 

Article  XV.— Passapc  of  lines  (No.  700).  Remarks  on  tke  dis- 
position of  the  artillery  in  the  passape  of  lines  (No.  717) 127 

Articlk  XVI. — Dispositions  against  cavalry  (No.  719).  To  form 
square  echelons  by  battalions  from  column  at  half-distance 
(No.  721).  Same  movement — the  column  at  full  distance  (No. 
727).  Same  movement — column  closed  in  mass  (No.  728).  To 
form  square  when  in  column  at  haM-distance  (No.  729).  To 
form  square  when  in  column  closed  in  mass  (No.  731).  To 
form  square  from  line  of  battle  (No.  734).  Oblique  squares 
(No.  740).  To  reform  the  line  (No.  746).  Remarks  on  oblique 
squares  (No.  753).  Remarks  on  the  disposition  of  the  artillo- 
ry  with  the  squares  (No.  754) 128 

TITLE  VII. 

EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  CORPS  D'ARMEE. 

General  principles  for  the  evolutions  of  a  corps  d'arm6e  (No.  1)  136 

A  division  of  the  line  (No.  2) 136 

Pouts  of  the  general-in-chief,  of  the  major-generals,  brigadier- 
generals,  in  line  and  iu  column  (No.  4) 130 

General  rules  for  commands  (No.  13) 137 

PART  FIRST. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ranks 140 

Article  IT. — Loading  at  will  and  tho  firings 140 

Article  III.— To  cause  the  line  to  rest 140 

•        PART   SECOND. 

Article  I.— To  break  to  the  front,  to  the  right,  or  loft,  into  col- 
umn   141 


CONTENTS.  159 

Article  II.— To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  loft  into  col- 
umn   142 

Article  III.  —To  ploy  the  line  into  column  or  in  masa 142 

PART  THIRD. 

Article  I.— To  march  in  column  at  full  distance 144 

Article  II. — Column  in  route 144 

Article  III. — To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance.'..!  144 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column,  and  to  align  it 144 

Article  Y. — To  close  to  half-distance  or  iu  mass. 145 

Article  VI.— To  march  in  column  at  half-distance  or  closed  in 

mass 145 

Article  VII.— To  change  direction  in  column  at  half-distance..  145 
Article  VIII. — To  change  dirc^ction  in  column  closed  in  mass...  145 
Article  IX.— Being  iu  column  at  half-distance  or  closed  in  mass, 

to  tak«  distances 146 

Article  X. — Countermarch 146 

Article  XI.— Being  in  column  by  company,  to  form  divisions...  146 

PART  FOURTH. 

Article  I.— Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle 146 

Article  II.— Mode  of  passing  from  column  at  full  distance  into 

line  of  battle 146 

Article  III. — Different  modes  of  passing  from  cohimn  at  half- 
distance  into  line  of  battle 146 

Article  IV.— Column  closed  in  mass  formed  into  line  of  battle  146 
Article  V.— Formation  into  lino  of  battle  composed  of  two  more- 

ments.    Remarks  on  the  formation  in  line 146 

Article  VI.— Deployment  by  battalion  in  mass.  Movements 
which  may  be  executed  by  a  lino  of  battalions  in  mass.  Re- 
marks on  inversion 148 

PART  FIFTH. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle,  deployed 149 

Article  II.-^o  halt  the  line,  and  to  align  it 149 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  marching  in  line  of  battle...  150 

Article  IV. — To  retreat  in  line  of  battle 160 

Article  V.— To  halt  the  line  marcliing  in  retreat,  and  to  align 

it   150 

Article  VI. — Change  of  direction  marching  in  retreat 150 

Article  VII.— March  in  line  of  battle  of  a  line  of  brigades  form- 
ed in  battalion  colnmns 150 

Article  VIII. — March  in  line  of  battle  by  the  flaak  of  compa- 
nies   150 

Articlb  IX. — March  in  line  of  battle  formed  in  division  col- 
umns  151 

Article  X. — To  pass  the  defile  in  front 151 

Article  XI. — To  pass  the  defile  in  rear 151 

Article  XII. — Changes  of  front 151 


160  CONTENTS. 

Article  XIII  — Ordor  in  echelon 152 

Article  XIV. — To  retreat  by  alternate  battalions 152 

Article  XV. — Tassnge  of  lines 152 

Article  XVI. — Dispositions  again.st  cavalry 152 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  the  infantry  of  the  reserve 153 

Constitution  of  the  reserve 153 


^^m 

ii^: 

!^-*.fl^;»?.>i./'^ 

mm€^m 

p^ffl 

^P^EI^^PWfiBGkfc  '-^HB-^H^BMaBWjS^BI^Mii 

SnT^-^^ 


flK'.-^*?: 


llliwl 


